Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Doca0214en 01

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 288

PacT Series

TransferPacT Active Automatic


TransferPacT Automatic
TransferPacT Remote
Transfer Switching Equipment
32–630 A
User Guide
PacT series offers world class breakers and switches.

DOCA0214EN–01
12/2022

www.se.com
Legal Information
The Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric SE and its
subsidiaries referred to in this guide are the property of Schneider Electric SE or its
subsidiaries. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and
furnished for informational use only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise), for any purpose, without the prior written permission of
Schneider Electric.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the guide
or its content, except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on an "as
is" basis. Schneider Electric products and equipment should be installed, operated,
serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information
contained in this guide may be subject to change without notice.
To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by
Schneider Electric and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the informational
content of this material or consequences arising out of or resulting from the use of the
information contained herein.

As part of a group of responsible, inclusive companies, we are updating our


communications that contain non-inclusive terminology. Until we complete this
process, however, our content may still contain standardized industry terms that may
be deemed inappropriate by our customers.
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Table of Contents
Safety Information ......................................................................................7
About the Book...........................................................................................8
Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE ............................................10
PacT Series Master Range .................................................................. 11
Overview............................................................................................12
Hardware Description..........................................................................13
Accessories........................................................................................19
Technical Characteristics ..........................................................................21
Dimensions ........................................................................................22
Clearance Distance.............................................................................24
Weights..............................................................................................37
TransferPacT Switch Functions and Characteristics ..............................38
TransferPacT Controller Functions and Characteristics..........................40
Assembly Matrix .................................................................................43
TransferPacT Controller ............................................................................44
TransferPacT TSE Overview ...............................................................45
Controller Function Module..................................................................46
Function Module Package Details...................................................48
Voluntary Remote Control ..............................................................49
Genset Start and Alarm .................................................................51
Load Shedding and Availability Warning .........................................53
Transfer Inhibit and Remote Testing................................................55
BUS Extension and 24 VDC Auxiliary Supply ..................................57
Fire Protections 24 V DC Pulse Input ..............................................59
Fire Protection 24 V DC Constant Input...........................................60
Fire Protection 230 V AC Constant Input .........................................61
Fire Protection Dry Contact Input....................................................62
Modbus RTU (Serial Port) ..............................................................63
Limitation of Accessories ...............................................................64
Input and Output Terminal Functions for RTSE......................................65
Overview ......................................................................................65
Product Availability ........................................................................66
Remote Transfer ...........................................................................67
Installation ...............................................................................................68
Mounting the Switch on Plate for Frame 100: 32-100 A and Frame
160: 80–160 A ....................................................................................69
Mounting the Switch on Plate for Frame 250: 100-250 A and Frame
630: 320–630 A ..................................................................................71
Mounting the Switch on DIN Rail for Frame 100: 32-100 A .....................73
Mounting the Switch on DIN Rail for Frame 160: 80–160 A.....................74
Front Door Cutout ...............................................................................75
Installation of Controller Function Module .............................................76
Replacement of Controller Function Module..........................................80
Mounting of External HMI ....................................................................85
Wiring ......................................................................................................88
Wiring Precautions..............................................................................89
Wiring of Function Modules .................................................................90
Wiring of Auxiliary Contacts .................................................................97

DOCA0214EN–01 3
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Wiring of Input and Output Terminals .................................................. 101


Wiring of External HMI....................................................................... 104
Wiring Diagrams for Frame 100: 32–100 A.......................................... 106
Wiring Diagrams for Frame 160: 80–160 A.......................................... 108
Wiring Diagrams for Frame 250: 100–250 A and Frame 630: 320–630
A ..................................................................................................... 109
Installation of Mechanism Accessories ..................................................... 110
Overview.......................................................................................... 111
Power Connection Accessories.......................................................... 112
Steel Connector .......................................................................... 112
Aluminum Connector ................................................................... 114
Linergy DP Distribution Block ....................................................... 120
Terminal Extension...................................................................... 121
Spreader .................................................................................... 124
Load Extension Bar ..................................................................... 127
Compression Lug ........................................................................ 129
Insulation Accessories....................................................................... 132
Terminal Cover............................................................................ 132
Interphase Barrier ....................................................................... 133
Terminal Shield ........................................................................... 135
Insulating Screen ........................................................................ 141
PowerTag ................................................................................... 145
Auxiliary Contacts ............................................................................. 146
HMI ....................................................................................................... 150
Overview.......................................................................................... 151
Automatic HMI with Rotary Switch as Embedded HMI.......................... 152
Active Automatic HMI with LCD Display as Embedded HMI.................. 154
Wizard Setup .............................................................................. 155
Home Page of LCD Display.......................................................... 157
Quickview Page .......................................................................... 158
Measurement Page ..................................................................... 159
Status Page ................................................................................ 160
Set & Operate Page .................................................................... 162
Quick Menu Tour ......................................................................... 189
External HMI .................................................................................... 192
Operations on ATSE ............................................................................... 193
Overview.......................................................................................... 194
Automatic HMI with Rotary Switch as Embedded HMI.......................... 195
Preferable Source Selection......................................................... 195
Transfer Condition....................................................................... 196
Time Delay ................................................................................. 200
Active Automatic HMI with LCD Display as Embedded HMI.................. 203
Preferable Source Selection......................................................... 203
Status Description Based on Source Selection .............................. 204
Transfer Condition....................................................................... 206
Time Delay ................................................................................. 211
Control Mode.................................................................................... 214
Overview .................................................................................... 214
Auto Mode .................................................................................. 216
Communication Control ............................................................... 227
Voluntary Transfer Mode.............................................................. 232

4 DOCA0214EN–01
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Test Mode................................................................................... 235


Return or Start from Auto Mode at Off Position .............................. 240
Local Control Mode ..................................................................... 241
Transfer Inhibit Mode................................................................... 243
Fire Protection Mode ................................................................... 243
Force to Off Mode ....................................................................... 243
Handle Transfer Mode ................................................................. 243
Operations on RTSE............................................................................... 244
Overview.......................................................................................... 245
Remote Transfer Process .................................................................. 245
Remote Transfer Condition ................................................................ 245
Modbus Communication ......................................................................... 246
Introduction ...................................................................................... 247
Modbus Master-Slave Principle.......................................................... 247
Modbus Functions ............................................................................ 251
Modbus Exception Codes.................................................................. 254
Modbus Registers............................................................................. 255
Alarms and Troubleshooting .................................................................... 267
Overview.......................................................................................... 268
Alarm ............................................................................................... 269
Warning ........................................................................................... 272
Event Logs ....................................................................................... 279
Dielectric Test......................................................................................... 283
Cybersecurity ......................................................................................... 284
Acronyms and Terminology .................................................................... 285

DOCA0214EN–01 5
Safety Information Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Safety Information
Important Information

NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar
with the device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The
following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the
equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of this symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label indicates that an
electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not
followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury
hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.

! DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.

! WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

! CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.

PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only
by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction,
installation, and operation of electrical equipment and has received safety training
to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.

DOCA0214EN–01 7
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A About the Book

About the Book


Document Scope
Use this guide to:
• Familiarize yourself with the mechanical and electrical characteristics of the
components of TransferPacTTM range of Automatic Transfer Switching
Equipment (ATSE) and Remote Transfer Switching Equipment (RTSE).
• Assemble and wire the ATSE and RTSE.

Validity Note
This user guide is valid for TransferPacT range of ATSE and RTSE configurations
as mentioned below:
• 4 current rating ranges:
◦ Frame 100: rated current 32–100 A
◦ Frame 160: rated current 80–160 A
◦ Frame 250: rated current 100-250 A
◦ Frame 630: rated current 320-630 A
• Number of poles
◦ 2P (only available for frame 100)
◦ 3P
◦ 4P
The availability of some functions described in this guide depends on physical
modules installed on the TransferPacT range of ATSE and RTSE.

Online Information
The information contained in this document is likely to be updated at any time.
Schneider Electric strongly recommends that you have the most recent and up-to-
date version available on www.se.com/ww/en/download.
The technical characteristics of the devices described in the present document
also appear online. To access the information online, go to the Schneider Electric
home page www.se.com.
The technical characteristics presented in this guide should be the same as those
that appear online. If you see a difference between the information contained in
this guide and online information, use the online information.
For product compliance with environmental directives such as RoHS, REACH,
PEP, and EOLI, go to www.se.com/green-premium.

Related Documentation
Document title Document reference number
Cybersecurity Guide DOCA0215EN-01

TransferPacT Active Automatic 32-100 A JYT3049801-00

TransferPacT Automatic 32-100 A


TransferPacT Active Automatic 80-160 A JYT3049901-00

TransferPacT Automatic 80-160 A

8 DOCA0214EN–01
About the Book Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Document title Document reference number

TransferPacT Active Automatic 100-250 A GEX2525501-00

TransferPacT Automatic 200-250 A

TransferPacT Remote 160-250 A


TransferPacT Active Automatic 320-630 A GEX2525601-00

TransferPacT Automatic 320-630 A

TransferPacT Remote 320-630 A

DOCA0214EN–01 9
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE

Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE


What’s in This Chapter
PacT Series Master Range ............................................................................ 11
Overview ......................................................................................................12
Hardware Description ....................................................................................13
Accessories ..................................................................................................19

10 DOCA0214EN–01
Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

PacT Series Master Range


Future-proof your installation with Schneider Electric's low-voltage and medium-
voltage Pact Series. Built on legendary Schneider Electric innovation, the Pact
Series comprises world-class circuit breakers, switches, residual current devices
and fuses, for all standard and specific applications. Experience robust
performance with Pact Series within the EcoStruxure-ready switchgear, from 16 to
6300 A in low-voltage and up to 40.5 kV in medium-voltage.

DOCA0214EN–01 11
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE

Overview
TransferPacT is a high speed, compact, modular design intelligent automatic
transfer switch that provide maximum scalability and robust performance.
• TransferPacT Automatic provides quick setting and easy view interface.
• TransferPacT Active Automatic provides comprehensive function with a build-
in controller and display. It is also provided with optional extended HMI to
display the HMI on the panel.
• TransferPacT Remote provides support to 3rd party control system and
provides quick setting and easy operation.
The TransferPacT ATSE/RTSE is an equipment containing one or more switching
devices for disconnecting the load circuits from one supply and connecting to
another supply.
It is a PC class ATSE/RTSE designed switch conforming to IEC 60947-6-1
standard and available from 32 to 630 A in 2, 3, and 4 poles with rated operating
voltage from 208-240 V / 380-440 V (phase to phase) and 220-250 V (phase to
neutral, for Frame 100 only).
There are three types of switching equipment:
• Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment (ATSE): Self-acting transfer
switching equipment, including all necessary sensing inputs, monitoring, and
control logic for transferring operations.
• Remote Transfer Switching Equipment (RTSE): Transfer switching equipment
that is electrically operated and not self-acting.
• Manual Transfer Switching Equipment (MTSE): Transfer switching equipment
operated manually and non-electrically.

Coding Principle
The commercial reference of Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment (ATSE)
and Remote Transfer Switching Equipment (RTSE) are coded with significant
features to explain the type of frame ratings, transition type, controller type, rated
voltage, rated current, and number of poles.

TA 16 D 4 S 160 4 T P E

TA: TransferPacT Auto Rated current (A) IEC


TR: TransferPacT Remote 032: 32 A
040: 40 A PC type
Frame rating 050: 50 A
10: 100 A (32-100 A) 063: 63 A Top entry
16: 160 A (80-160 A) 080: 80 A
25: 250A (100-250 A) 100: 100 A
63: 630A (320-630 A) 125: 125 A Rated voltage (V)
160: 160 A 2: 230 V*
Off delay 200: 200 A 3: 230 V**
250: 250 A 4: 400 V*
Number of poles 320: 320 A
2: 2 poles 400: 400 A factory default value
3: 3 poles 500: 500 A * L to L
4: 4 poles 630: 630 A ** L to N

Controller
L: Active automatic HMI
S: Automatic HMI
R: Remote

12 DOCA0214EN–01
Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Hardware Description
Equipment Description
I H G F E

TransferPacT

SI SII
Auto

C A

< S II

<SI

H
SI SII

OF/AUX

A
TA63D4S6304TPE Autom atic

Ie: 630A Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz


AC-33B Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

B < Load

C
I F G

Label Description

A Position for modular for HMI


B Active Automatic HMI (with LCD display)

C Automatic HMI (with rotary switch)

D Controller extension accessory

E Power connections
F Position indicator
G 3- position slider: Auto/Manual/Lock

H Single line diagram

I Dielectric switch
J Protective earth

DOCA0214EN–01 13
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE

Active Automatic HMI (with LCD Display) Description

Label Description

A Navigation button to return to previous page

B Navigation button of rolling up

C Navigation button of rolling down

D OK button to confirm any status

Automatic HMI (with Rotary Switch) Description


F

A 10
5
12
6 714
U 8 8 16
f 50Hz 60Hz 4
B 230 240 6 3 9 18 G
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
C 220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 2 20
D (N
t
A 1 30 H
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60
E 3
5 10
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N 1 30 I
0 (min) 60

Label Description

A Rated frequency

B Time delay for center-off position

C Type of sources:
• Utility/Utility
• Utility/Genset

D Source priority

E Transition mode for return to normal position

F Rated voltage

G Voltage and frequency thresholds setting

H Transfer time delay in seconds from normal source to


alternate source
I Transfer time delay in minutes from alternate source to
normal source

14 DOCA0214EN–01
Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Single Line Diagram Description


G F E

TransferPacT

A SI SII D

B C

A B C D

SI SII G

Label Description

A Source I power status indicator

B Contact position of source I

C Contact position of source II

D Source II power status indicator

E Alarm indicator
F ‘Not in Auto’ status indicator
G Power ON indicator
H “Run” status indicator

DOCA0214EN–01 15
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE

Single Line Diagram LED

SI SII

SI SII

LED Status Description


indication
No energy, ATSE power off

ATSE updating in process or in Test mode in progress


400 ms

ATSE is running in normal operation, ready to transfer

The ATSE is running in Auto mode

The ATSE will be in Not in Automatic mode, and will not


automatically transfer in case of source failure.

No alarm

Alarm is active

SI No Source I

Source I out of range


400 ms

Source I present and in the range

SII No Source II

Source II out of range


400 ms

Source II present and in the range

Source I is opened (Not connected)


I

Time delay is running for transferring


400 ms

Source I is closed (Connected)

Source II is opened (Not connected)


II

Time delay is running for transferring


400 ms

Source II is closed (Connected)

16 DOCA0214EN–01
Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

LED Status Description


indication
Both sources are out of range, or the transfer switch equipment is in
manual/lock mode
Either source is in range and transfer switch equipment is in RUN
mode
No alarm

Alarm is active (Transfer failure, transfer switch equipment contact


position failure, internal error occurred)

NOTE: The LED indicator on the equipment and the external HMI is for
reference. In the event of a contradiction between the LED and the position
indicator on the ATSE, the latter prevail.

DOCA0214EN–01 17
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE

Position Indicator

TransferPacT

SI SII
Auto

Position indicator Status

OFF

Source I is connected

Source II is connected

18 DOCA0214EN–01
Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Accessories
External HMI
The accessories for external HMI are as below:
• External HMI (Base and Active Automatic HMI display using TPCCIF04)
• HMI cable (using TRV00810, TRV00820, TRV00830)
• IP 54 cover (for outdoor installation using TPCOTH37)

Controller Function Modules


The options and spare parts are:
• Load shedding and availability warning (TPCDIO05)
• Genset start and alarm (TPCDIO17)
• Transfer inhibit and remote testing (TPCDIO07)
• Voluntary remote control (TPCDIO08)
• Fire protection
◦ 24 V dc pulse (TPCDIO10)
◦ 24 V dc constant (TPCDIO11)
◦ 230 V ac constant (TPCDIO13)
◦ 1 Dry contact (TPCDIO14)
• BUS extension and 24 V dc auxiliary supply (TPCDIO15)
◦ 24 V+ and 24 V- dc port
◦ RJ45
• Modbus RTU (TPCCOM16)

Switch
The accessories for the switch are as below:
• Auxiliary contacts
◦ OF Auxiliary contacts (Wired) (TPSAUX32, TPSAUX33, TPSAUX43,
TPSAUX44)
• Power connection accessories
◦ Compression lug (LV429252, LV429253, LV429254, LV429256,
LV429257, LV429258, LV429504, LV429505, LV429506, LV429507,
TPSCON57, TPSCON58, TPSCON59, TPSCON60)
◦ Steel connectors (LV429242, LV429243)
◦ Aluminum connectors (LV429227, LV429228, LV429259, LV429260,
TPSCON47, TPSCON48, TPSCON49, TPSCON50, TPSCON51,
TPSCON52, TPSCON53, TPSCON54)
◦ Straight terminal extensions (LV429263, LV429264)
◦ Edgewise terminal extensions (LV429308, LV429309, TPSCON55,
TPSCON56)
◦ Spreaders (LV431563, LV431564, TPSCON39,TPSCON40, TPSCON41,
TPSCON68 )
◦ Load extension bars (TPSCON35, TPSCON36)
◦ Linergy DP distribution block (LVS04033, LVS04034)

DOCA0214EN–01 19
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Introduction to TransferPacT ATSE and RTSE

• Insulation Accessories
◦ Interphase barrier (TPSISO29, TPSISO65)
◦ Terminal shield (TPSISO30, TPSISO31)
◦ Long terminal shield (LV429518, TPSISO42)
◦ Insulating screen (TPSISO66, TPSISO67)
• Monitoring accessories
◦ PowerTag (LV434021)

20 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Technical Characteristics
What’s in This Chapter
Dimensions...................................................................................................22
Clearance Distance .......................................................................................24
Weights ........................................................................................................37
TransferPacT Switch Functions and Characteristics.........................................38
TransferPacT Controller Functions and Characteristics ....................................40
Assembly Matrix............................................................................................43

DOCA0214EN–01 21
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

Dimensions
This section describes the dimensions of the TransferPacT Active Automatic,
Automatic and Remote transfer switches. The dimensions are provided in
millimeters and inches.

Dimensions for Frame 100: 32–100 A


mm
310
in. 12.20 73.5
155 2.89
6.10

45.35 40
1.57
80.85 1.78 85
TransferPacT
3.18 3.34
155 125 X SI SII
Auto

6.10 4.92
77.5
3.05

Y
29.5
1.16
79.5
3.13
89.5
3.52
94.25
3.71

Dimensions for Frame 160: 80–160 A


mm 351
in. 13.81 75
175.5 2.95
6.90

64.5 59.5
2.53 2.34
104.5
TransferPacT
4.11
164 X SI SII
Auto
TA16D4S1604TPE Automatic

6.45
ATSE Open transition Insulation test is done
Ie:160A Ue:AC380V~440V in factory wrong
Icw:10kA/0.1s dielectirc test will
No:20312050020 damage the controller.

82
3.22

Y 80
3.14
90 4.9
3.54 0.19

22 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Dimensions for Frame 250: 100–250 A


mm 370
in. 14.56 185.8
12 7.31
162 196 0.47 8
6.3 165.7
6.37 7.71 0.31 6.52
0.24

341
13.42
300 SI SII
325
11.81 115 12.79
X 4.52
TA25D4S2504TPE Automatic

101.3 Ie: 250A


AC-33B
Ue: AC380-440V 50/60Hz
Icw: 10kA/0.5s,15kA/0.1s
No. 220403010002
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

3.98
75
2.95

20.7 163.25 8
0.81 6.42 Y 0.31
326.5 4x Ø7
12.85 4x Ø0.28

Dimensions for Frame 630: 320–630 A


mm
467
in. 18.38
162 230 75 185.8
4.3 6.37 7.71 8 7.31
0.47
0.17 0.31
165.7
6.52
< S II

<SI

300 SI SII 325 341


11.81 13.42 13.42
X 115 OF/AUX

4.52
TA63D4S6304TPE Automatic

101.5 Ie: 630A


AC-33B
Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz
Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

3.98 22
< Load
0.86

20.7 183.5 8
0.81 7.22 Y 0.31

367 4x Ø7
14.45 4x Ø0.28

DOCA0214EN–01 23
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

Clearance Distance
This section describes the safety clearance distances for ATSE and RTSE switch
and its accessories such as:
1. Terminal shield
2. Auxiliary contact
3. Cables
4. Lugs
5. Busbar
6. Interphase barrier

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Install the device so minimum clearance distance to grounded metal is
maintained.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Clearance Distance for Frame 100: 32–100 A


Safety Clearance for Switch

≥ 40
≥ 1.57

10
12
6 7
14 TransferPacT
5
8 8 16
f 50Hz 60Hz U 4
6 3 9 18
230 240 f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
SI SII
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t
2 20 Auto
(N A 1 30
0 (s) 60
5 10
3
t 2 20

≥5 ≥5
(A N 1 30
0 (min) 60

≥ 0.19 ≥ 0.19

≥ 40
≥ 1.57

Safety Clearance for Terminal Shield

≥0
≥0

10
12
6 7
14 TransferPacT
5
8 8 16
f 50Hz 60Hz U 4
6 3 9 18
230 240 f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
SI SII
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t
2 20 Auto
(N A 1 30
0 (s) 60
5 10
3
t 2 20
(A N 1 30
0 (min) 60

≥5 ≥5
≥ 0.19 ≥ 0.19

≥0
≥0

24 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Safety Clearance for Auxiliary Contact

≥ 40
≥ 1.57

TransferPacT

SI SII

≥5 Auto
≥5
≥ 0.19 ≥ 0.19

≥ 40
≥ 1.57

Safety Clearance for Cable

≥ 18
≥ 0.71

Safety Clearance for Busbar

≥ 21
≥ 0.83

DOCA0214EN–01 25
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

Clearance Distance for Frame 160: 80–160 A


Safety Clearance for Switch

≥ 40
≥ 1.57

≥5 TransferPacT
≥5
≥ 0.19 SI SII
Auto
≥ 0.19
TA16D4S1604TPE Automatic
ATSE Ue:AC380V~440V
Ie:160A Open transition Insulation test is done
in factory wrong
Icw:10kA/0.1s dielectirc test will
No:20312050020 damage the controller.

≥ 40
≥ 1.57

Safety Clearance for Terminal Shield

≥0
≥0

≥5 TransferPacT
≥5
≥ 0.19 SI SII
Auto
≥ 0.19
TA16D4S1604TPE Automatic
ATSE Open transition Insulation test is done
Ie:160A Ue:AC380V~440V in factory wrong
Icw:10kA/0.1s dielectirc test will
No:20312050020 damage the controller.

≥0
≥0

Safety Clearance for Auxiliary Contact

≥ 40
≥ 1.57

≥5 TransferPacT
≥5
≥ 0.19 SI SII
Auto
≥ 0.19
TA16D4S1604TPE Automatic
ATSE Open transition Insulation test is done
Ie:160A Ue:AC380V~440V in factory wrong
Icw:10kA/0.1s dielectirc test will
No:20312050020 damage the controller.

≥ 40
≥ 1.57

26 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Safety Clearance for Interphase Barrier

≥0
≥0

≥5 TransferPacT
≥5
≥ 0.19 SI SII
Auto
≥ 0.19
TA16D4S1604TPE Automatic
ATSE Open transition Insulation test is done
Ie:160A Ue:AC380V~440V in factory wrong
Icw:10kA/0.1s dielectirc test will
No:20312050020 damage the controller.

≥0
≥0

Safety Clearance for Lug

≥ 25
≥ 0.98

Safety Clearance for Busbar

≥ 25
≥ 0.98

DOCA0214EN–01 27
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

Clearance Distance for Frame 250: 80–160 A


Safety Clearance for Switch

≥ 100
≥ 3.93

≥5
≥ 0.19

≥ 20 SI SII

≥ 0.78

TA25D4S2504TPE Automatic

Ie: 250A Ue: AC380-440V 50/60Hz


AC-33B Icw: 10kA/0.5s,15kA/0.1s
No. 220403010002
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

≥ 80
≥ 3.14

Safety Clearance for Terminal Shield

≥0
≥0

≥5
≥ 0.19

SI SII

≥ 20
≥ 0.78

TA25D4S2504TPE Automatic

Ie: 250A Ue: AC380-440V 50/60Hz


AC-33B Icw: 10kA/0.5s,15kA/0.1s
No. 220403010002
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

≥0
≥0

28 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Safety Clearance for Interphase Barrier

≥ 160
≥ 6.29

≥5
≥ 0.19

≥ 20 SI SII

≥ 0.78

TA25D4S2504TPE Automatic

Ie: 250A Ue: AC380-440V 50/60Hz


AC-33B Icw: 10kA/0.5s,15kA/0.1s
No. 220403010002
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

≥ 130
≥ 5.11

Safety Clearance for Lug

≥8
≥ 0.31

DOCA0214EN–01 29
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

Safety Clearance for Busbar

≥8
≥ 0.31

Rules to Ensure Insulation for Frame 250


Type of conductor No insulating Interphase Long terminal Insulating Insulating
accessory barrier shield screen for 1 lug screen for 2
per terminal lugs per
terminal
Insulated bars Possible Possible Possible Possible -

Insulated bars + - Mandatory - Mandatory -


straight terminal
extensions

Insulated bars + - Mandatory - Possible -


edgewise
terminal
extensions

Insulated bars + - Mandatory - Mandatory -


spreaders

Cables (Al) + - Mandatory Possible - -


crimp lugs (Supplied)

30 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Type of conductor No insulating Interphase Long terminal Insulating Insulating


accessory barrier shield screen for 1 lug screen for 2
per terminal lugs per
terminal
Cables (Cu) + - Mandatory Possible Possible Mandatory
crimp lugs (Supplied)

Cables (Al) + - Mandatory - Mandatory -


crimp lugs + (Supplied)
straight terminal
extensions

Cables (Al) + - Mandatory - Mandatory -


crimp lugs + (Supplied)
Spreaders

Cables (Cu) + - Mandatory( - Mandatory NA / Mandatory


crimp lugs + Supplied) (120 mm 2 only)
straight terminal
extensions

Cables (Cu) + - Mandatory - Possible -


crimp lugs + (Supplied)
edgewise
terminal
extensions

Cables (Cu) + - Mandatory - Mandatory NA / Mandatory


crimp lugs + (Supplied) (120 mm 2 only)
spreaders

Cables + steel Possible Possible Possible - -


connectors

LV429242

LV429243

DOCA0214EN–01 31
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

Type of conductor No insulating Interphase Long terminal Insulating Insulating


accessory barrier shield screen for 1 lug screen for 2
per terminal lugs per
terminal
Cables + - - Mandatory - -
aluminum
connectors

TPSCON47

TPSCON48

TPSCON49

TPSCON50

TPSCON51

TPSCON52
Cables + Possible Possible Possible - -
aluminum
connectors

LV429227

LV429259

LV429228

LV429260

32 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Clearance Distance for Frame 630: 320–630 A


Safety Clearance for Switch

≥ 110
≥ 4.33

< S II

<SI

SI SII

≥ 20 OF/AUX
≥5
≥ 0.79 TA63D4S6304TPE Automatic
≥ 0.19
Ie: 630A Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz
AC-33B Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

< Load

≥ 80
≥ 3.15

Safety Clearance for Terminal Shield

≥0
≥0

< S II

<SI

SI SII

≥ 20 OF/AUX
≥5
≥ 0.79 TA63D4S6304TPE Automatic
≥ 0.19
Ie: 630A Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz
AC-33B Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

< Load

≥0
≥0

DOCA0214EN–01 33
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

Safety Clearance for Interphase Barrier

≥ 150
≥ 5.9

< S II

<SI

SI SII

≥ 20 OF/AUX
≥5
≥ 0.79 TA63D4S6304TPE Automatic
≥ 0.19
Ie: 630A Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz
AC-33B Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

< Load

≥ 150
≥ 5.9

Safety Clearance for Lug

≥ 14 ≥ 14
≥ 0.55 ≥ 0.55

≥ 14
≥ 0.55

34 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Safety Clearance for Busbar

≥ 14 ≥ 14
≥ 0.55 ≥ 0.55

≥ 14
≥ 0.55

Rules to Ensure Insulation for Frame 630


Type of conductor No insulating Interphase Long terminal Insulating Insulating
accessory barrier shield screen for 1 lug screen for 2
per terminal lugs per
terminal
Insulated bars Possible Possible Possible Possible -

Insulated bars + - Mandatory - Possible -


edgewise
terminal
extensions

Insulated bars + - Mandatory - SI: front screen -


spreaders mandatory

SII: rear screen


mandatory

Load: front
screen
mandatory

Cables (Al) - Mandatory Possible (instead SI: front screen -


+crimp lugs (Supplied) of phase mandatory
barriers)
Load: front
screen
mandatory

Cables (Cu) - Mandatory Possible (instead SII: rear screen SII: rear screen
+crimp lugs (Supplied) of phase possible mandatory
barriers)

DOCA0214EN–01 35
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

Type of conductor No insulating Interphase Long terminal Insulating Insulating


accessory barrier shield screen for 1 lug screen for 2
per terminal lugs per
terminal
Cables (Al) + - Mandatory - SI: front screen -
crimp lugs + (Supplied) mandatory
spreaders
SII: rear screen
mandatory

Load: front
screen
mandatory

Cables (Cu) + - Mandatory - Possible -


crimp lugs + (Supplied)
edgewise
terminal
extensions

Cables (Cu) + - Mandatory - SI: front screen SI: front screen


crimp lugs + (Supplied) mandatory mandatory
spreaders
SII: rear screen SII: rear screen
mandatory mandatory

Load: front Load: front


screen screen
mandatory mandatory

Cables + Possible - Mandatory - -


aluminum
connectors

36 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Weights
This section describes the weights of the TransferPacT Automatic, TransferPacT
Active Automatic and TransferPacT Remote switches.

Frame Ratings Weights

Frame 100: 32–100 A 3.4 kg

Frame 160: 80–160 A 5.6 kg

Frame 250: 100–250 A 13.3 kg

Frame 630: 320-630 A 22.1 kg

DOCA0214EN–01 37
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

TransferPacT Switch Functions and Characteristics


Frame 100 A 160 A 250 A 630 A
Type of device Non-derived TSE PC Non-derived TSE PC Non-derived TSE PC Non-derived TSE PC
type type type type

Suitable for isolation

Electrical Characteristics
Current rating (Ampere) 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 ⃰, 100 80, 100, 125, 160 100, 160, 200, 250 320, 400, 500, 630

⃰ : AC-32 B for 80 A and


100 A
Rated operational voltage 2P: 220/230/240/250 V 3P, 4P: 380/400/415/ 3P, 4P: 208/220/230/ 3P, 4P: 208/220/230/
L–N 440 V L–L 240V L–L 240V L–L
380/400/415/440 V L–L 380/400/415/440 V L–L
3P, 4P: 380/400/415/
440 V L–L
Number of poles 2, 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4

Frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz 50 Hz/60 Hz 50 Hz/60 Hz 50 Hz/60 Hz

Insulating voltage Ui (V AC) 800 V 800 V 800 V 800 V


switch only

Impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6 kV 8 kV 8 kV 12 kV


(V AC) switch only

Rated short- Switch alone 15 20 30 40


circuit making
capacity Icm with Upstream 75 154 330 330
(kA) Circuit Breaker

Rated short-time withstand 5 kA/0.1 s 10 kA/0.1 s 15 kA/0.1 s, 10 kA/0.5 25 kA.0.1 s, 20 kA/


current Icw (kA) s, 8 kA/1 s 0.5s, 15 kA/1 s

Utilization category AC-33B AC-33B AC-33B AC-33B

Operating temperature -25⁰C to +70⁰C -25⁰C to +70⁰C -25⁰C to +70⁰C -25⁰C to +70⁰C

Operational Characteristics

Overvoltage category III III III III

Maintenance Mechanical 8000 cycles 10000 cycles 10000 cycles 10000 cycles
durability

Additional Indication and Control Auxiliaries


Auxiliary contacts for N and A
position

Auxiliary contacts for OFF


position

Installation and Connection


Fixed top connection

Installation method DIN Rail/Base Plate DIN Rail/Base Plate Base Plate Base Plate
Installation and Connection Accessories
Terminal shields

Inter-phase barriers -

Load extension Bars

* *
Shipping Information

Net weight kg 3.4 5.6 13.3 21.7

38 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Frame 100 A 160 A 250 A 630 A


Dimension L*W*D mm 155 * 310 * 94.3 164 * 351 * 95 370 * 341 * 186 467 * 341 * 186
* Refer to the power connection for more details.

NOTE:
• : Solid green square represents standard function.
• : Hollow square represents optional function.

DOCA0214EN–01 39
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

TransferPacT Controller Functions and Characteristics


Controller type Active Automatic version Automatic version with rotary Remote version without HMI
with LCD display switch

Installation Embedded controller Embedded controller -

Controller Functional Characteristics


2P 230 V: can be set at 220 V / 240 230 V: can be set at 220 V / 240
V / 250 V (L-N, available for V / 250 V (L-N, available for
Frame 100) Frame 100)

3P / 4P 230 V: can be set at 208 V / 220 400 V: Can be set at 380 V / 230 V: 208 V / 220 V / 240 V (L-
V / 240 V (L-L, available for 415 V / 440 V L, available for Frame 250 and
Frame 250 and 630) 630)

400 V: Can be set at 380 V / 400 V: 380 V / 415 V / 440 V


415 V / 440 V
Rated operating frequency (Hz) 50/60 50/60 50/60

Rated insulation voltage (V) 500 500 500

Impulse withstand voltage (KV) 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV

Operating temperature -25 °C to +70 °C -25 °C to +70 °C -25 °C to +70 °C

Operating altitude ≤ 2000 m ≤ 2000 m ≤ 2000 m

Protection degree IP 20 IP 20 IP 20

Pollution degree 3 3 3

Accuracy(for power Voltage 1% 1% -


deviation)
Frequen- 0.1 % 0.1 % -
cy

Electrostatic discharge Level 4 Level 41 Level 4

Radio-frequency electromagnetic Level 3 Level 3 Level 3


field
Fast transient bursts Level 4 Level 4 Level 4
Surges Level 4 Level 4 Level 4

Harmonic wave Class 3 Class 3 Class 3


Voltage dips and short-time Class 3 Class 3 Class 3
interruptions

Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6

Shock IEC 60068-2-27 IEC 60068-2-27 IEC 60068-2-27


Display of Controller

Display mode LCD + LED + Indicator Rotary switch + DIP switch + LED + Indicator
LED + Indicator
Single line diagram

Language English/Chinese/French/ Not Applicable -


Russian/Spanish/Italian/
German/Portuguese

Power status Run/Alarm display

Position for contact -

Set value Button Rotary switch + DIP switch -

Control Mode
Auto Auto -
return
Non -
return
Non-Auto Handle -

1. Close the plastic cover.

40 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Controller type Active Automatic version Automatic version with rotary Remote version without HMI
with LCD display switch

Force -

Fire -

Inhibit -

Local - -

Voluntary -

Test -

Auto Control
Sampling Three Phase for both normal Three Phase for both normal -
and alternate and alternate
Voltage loss < 36 V < 36 V -

Phase loss L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 -

Under voltage Set value 70% to 95% 4%, 6%, 8%, 10%, 12%, 14%, -
16%, 18%, 20%

Over voltage Set value 105% to 135% 4%, 6%, 8%, 10%, 12%, 14%, -
16%, 18%, 20%

Under frequency Set value 80% to 98% 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, -
9%, 10%

Over frequency Set value 101% to 120% 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, -
9%, 10%

Unbalance of three phase voltage 2% to 30% - -

Phase rotation Yes - -

Time Delay

Transfer delay 0 to 30 minutes U-U: 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 -


s. U-G: 5 s
Retransfer delay 0 to 60 minutes 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 min -

Center of delay 0 to 30 s 0 or 5 s -

Genset start delay 0 to 120 s 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s -

Genset cooldown delay 0 to 60 minutes - -

Loadshedding delay 0 to 15 s - -

Genset ready alarm delay 15-300 s 300 s -

Test delay:on load 1-1800 s - -

Test delay:off load 1-1800 s - -

Other Functions
Calender time - -

Position feedback

Event log - -

Source priority -

Communication Modbus RTU - -

Transfer Inhibit -

Password protection - -

Gen start-stop -

Test -

Load shedding -

Fire protection -

DOCA0214EN–01 41
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Technical Characteristics

Controller type Active Automatic version Automatic version with rotary Remote version without HMI
with LCD display switch

Failure lock

Alarm indication

External power supply port - -

Wrong connection of neutral - -


alarm

42 DOCA0214EN–01
Technical Characteristics Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Assembly Matrix
Device Type of HMI Number Voltage Type of Rated current
of poles connection

Frame 100 Active Automatic 2 220/230/240/250 V Top 32 A, 40 A, 50 A, 63 A, 80 A, 100 A


HMI (LCD)
3 380/400/415/440 V
4
Automatic HMI 2 220/230/240/250 V
(Rotary and DIP
switch) 3 380/400/415/440 V
4
Frame 160 Active Automatic 3 380/400/415/440 V Top 80 A, 100 A, 125 A, 160 A
HMI (LCD)
4
Automatic HMI 3 380/400/415/440 V
(Rotary and DIP
switch) 4

Frame 250 Active Automatic 3 208/220/230/240/380/ Top 100 A, 160 A, 200 A, 250 A
HMI (LCD) 400/415/440 V
4
Automatic HMI 3 208/220/230/240/380/
(Rotary and DIP 400/415/440 V
switch) 4

Remote 3 208/220/230/240/380/ 160 A, 200 A, 250 A


400/415/440 V
4
Frame 630 Active Automatic 3 208/220/230/240/380/ Top 320 A, 400 A, 500 A, 630 A
HMI (LCD) 400/415/440 V
4
Automatic HMI 3 208/220/230/240/380/
(Rotary and DIP 400/415/440 V
switch) 4

Remote 3 208/220/230/240/380/
400/415/440 V
4

DOCA0214EN–01 43
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

TransferPacT Controller
What’s in This Chapter
TransferPacT TSE Overview ..........................................................................45
Controller Function Module ............................................................................46
Input and Output Terminal Functions for RTSE ................................................65

44 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

TransferPacT TSE Overview


TransferPacT ATSE is provided with advanced microprocessor controller with two
options:
• Active automatic HMI (LCD display and keypad)
• Automatic HMI (Rotary and DIP switch)
It is a robust and reliable controller which offers all of the voltage, frequency,
control, timing and diagnostic functions required for wide range of power
applications.
The Automatic HMI is an easy install and use, while Active automatic HMI
contains every function needed with 8 control modes.
There are two key features of TransferPacT ATSE controller:
• Automatic HMI can be hot swapped to Active Automatic HMI, an easy way to
upgrade your controller, HMI can also be easily replaced for maintenance or
renewal.
• 10 types of function modules can be installed on TransferPacT ATSE
controller at any time, which provide maximum scalability and a reduced total
cost of ownership and add a function as demand grows.
TransferPacT RTSE has intelligent control with CPU integrated in switch, it is
provided with:
• Input and output terminals
Besides the terminals for I/O signals, it also provides power and product state and
alarm indication through LED indicator on product front face.
TransferPacT Remote is designed to manage the transfer according to the
incoming command of the third party. It can work with third party system, like
generator-set controllers, PLCs etc.

DOCA0214EN–01 45
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Controller Function Module


The controller function module is used to extend the interactive function of the
TransferPacT ATSE.
TransferPacT ATSE provides the source changeover solution with controller
function modules to upgrade without interruption of power.
The controller function module has three core parts:
• Rotary cover: It is used to insert or plug the accessories by opening the
cover.
• LED: It is used to indicate the power status and connection of the
accessories. Green LED indicates that the accessories are powered and
properly connected, and OFF indicates that the accessories are not live
except for bus extension and 24 Vdc auxiliary supply module (TPCDIO15), it
is ON to indicate there is an external 24 Vdc power supply .
• Power terminals: It is used for wiring.

LED

Rotary cover

Power terminals

NOTE: Controller function modules are only supported by TransferPacT


Active Automatic and TransferPacT Automatic Transfer switching equipment.

DIO:LS/AW DIO:VT DIO:F DIO:F


TPCDIO05 TPCDIO07 TPCDIO08 TPCDIO10 TPCDIO11

Load shedding Inhibit Test Voluntary DC24V Pulse DC24V constant


Enable
TI1 RT1 V1 V2 F1

LS2 LS1 LS4 P1+ P1-


C1+ C1-

Disable
AW1 AW2
V0 V0 V0
TI2 RT2 P2+ P2-
Warning To N To A To Off

DIO:F DIO:F DIO:CE/EP COM:Modbus DIO:G/A


TPCDIO13 TPCDIO14 TPCDIO15 TPCCOM16 TPCDIO17

AC230V constant Dry contact DC24V Genset start

C1+ C1-
W1 24V
/ 24V
G2 G1 G4

Bus extension
A1 A2
W2
Shield Alarming

46 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Name of module
Type of module (depending on functions)

DIO:VT
1.1 1.2 1.3 TPCDIO08

V1 V2 F1 DIO:VT
TPCDIO08 Commercial reference

LED: Green when it is powered

V0 V0 V0

To N To A To Off Voluntary Voluntary: function of module


2.1 2.2 2.3 V1 V2 F1

V0 V0 V0
1.1 1.2 1.3
To N To A To Off

2.1 2.2 2.3

The details of the terminals of function modules are shown below:

Commercial Description Wiring terminals Notes


Reference
TPCDIO05 Load shedding and 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3
availability warning
LS2 LS1 LS4 AW1 AW2 LS: Load shedding

AW: Available warning

TPCDIO07 Transfer inhibit and remote 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3
testing
TI: Transfer inhibit
TI1 RT1 TI2 RT2
RT: Remote testing

TPCDIO08 Voluntary remote control 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3
V1 V2 F1 V0 V0 V0 V: Voluntary remote
control
TPCDIO10 Fire protection-24 Vdc pulse 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3
input
P1+ P1- P2+ P2 P: Pulse input

TPCDIO11 Fire protection-24 Vdc 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3
constant input
C1+ C1- C:constant input

TPCDIO13 Fire protection-230 Vac 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3
constant input
C1+ C1- C:constant input

TPCDIO14 Fire protection-1 Dry 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3
contact input
W1 W2 W: Dry contact

TPCDIO15 BUS extension and 24 Vdc 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3
auxiliary supply
24v+ 24V- RJ 45 RJ45: Bus extension

24v+/24-: External power

TPCCOM16 Modbus RTU (Serial Port) 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3
D1 D0 0V Shield Modbus:Modbus
communication
TPCDIO17 Genset start and alarm 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3

DOCA0214EN–01 47
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Commercial Description Wiring terminals Notes


Reference

G2 G1 G4 A1 A2 G: Genset control

A: Alarm

Function Module Package Details


In the packaging box, the function module and light instruction are provided.

JYT3250401

48 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Voluntary Remote Control


The voluntary remote control modules are the accessory module installed on
TransferPacT Automatic and TransferPacT Active Automatic controller with the
following functions:
• Voluntary remote control to N or A, 2 NO contacts are provided.
• Force to off, 1 NO contact is provided.
• Green LED on the front face of the accessory indicates the power status and
proper connection of the accessory.
• Communication with the main MCU on TSE.
• Only one voluntary remote controller module is allowed to be installed on the
product.

Application Voluntary to N or A
Voluntary transfer is an active input which can transfer the ATSE to normal or
alternate source according to requirements (such as energy saving).
Voluntary transfer will still keep the power continuity as much as possible. The
function will be bypassed, if target source lost the power. For example, after
voluntary to A while A source failed, ATSE will transfer back to N if N is available.
Exit the voluntary mode after signal disappeared.

Force to Off
Force to Off is an emergency stop order, to transfer the ATSE to off position. All
the other transfer mode will be canceled except handle control.
Exit Force to Off after signal disappeared.

Terminals
There are three terminals of the voluntary remote controller modules as below:
• V1-V0: Voluntary to N
• V2-V0: Voluntary to A
• F1-V0: Force to Off

DIO:VT
1.1 1.2 1.3 TPCDIO08

V1 V2 F1

Voluntary

V0 V0 V0 V1 V2 F1

2.1 2.2 2.3


V0 V0 V0

To N To A To Off

Signal Type
• Digital input with dry contact.
• Need over 200 ms input to start voluntary remote control.

DOCA0214EN–01 49
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 30 Vdc
Minimum input current 5 mA

Altitude 2000 m

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).

50 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Genset Start and Alarm


The Genset start and Alarm is an accessory module installed on TransferPacT
Automatic and TransferPacT Active Automatic controller with following functions:
• Genset output control with optional time delay function, 1 NC and 1 NO dry
contacts are provided.
• Alarm output, 1 NO dry contact is provided.
• Green LED on the top of the accessory indicates the power status and proper
connection of the accessory.
• Communication with the main MCU on TSE.
• Only one Genset start (with capacitor) and alarm is allowed to be installed on
one product.

Application Genset Start Output


When the utility source is lost, a dry contact will start the Genset irrespective with
or without external 24 Vdc. A time delay (T7) before Genset start can be set with
or without external 24 V.
When the utility source has recovered and ATSE has transferred back to Utility,
the Genset signal will remain until the end of the Genset cooldown timer.

Alarm
When there is an alarm, a dry contact will give the signal.
For Automatic version, restart the controller (open and close the dielectric door) to
shut down the alarm.
For Active version, refer to Alarm, page 269 and follow the procedures to
acknowledge the alarm.
NOTE: Contact field service first to record the alarm. Then try the procedures
above incase of emergency.
The alarm signal is irrelevant to Genset start or stop. It is relevant to transfer
errors and phase rotations errors listed in Alarm Message, page 270 .

Terminals
For Genset start: 1 NO + 1 NC:
• NO: G1-G4
• NC: G1-G2
When Genset start initiates, NC terminal will close, and NO terminal will open.
Alarm: 1 NO
• NO : A1-A2
When alarm initiates, NO terminal will close.

DOCA0214EN–01 51
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

DIO:G/A
TPCDIO17

G2 G1 G4

1.1 1.2 1.3


Genset start

A1 A2
G2 G1 G4

2.1 2.3 A1 A2

Alarming

Signal Type
Digital output.

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 300 V
Maximum output voltage 250 Vac,50/60 Hz or 30 Vdc

Maximum output current 5A

Over voltage category III

Pollution degree 3

Altitude 2000 m

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).

52 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Load Shedding and Availability Warning


The load shedding and availability warning is an accessory module installed on
TransferPacT Automatic and TransferPacT Active Automatic controller with
following functions:
• Load shedding output, 1 NO and 1 NC dry contacts is provided.
• Available warning, 1 NO dry contact is provided.
• Green LED is on the top of the accessory indicates the power status and
proper connection of the accessory.
• Communication with the main MCU on TSE .
• Only one load shedding and availability warning is allowed to be installed on
one product.

Application Load Shedding


The Alternate power (Genset) sometimes may not afford all loads. A signal from
controller will shed some non-critical loads.
Load shedding will send the signal after enabling this function.

Application Availability Warning


When transfer switch is not in auto or power lost on two sources, a dry contact will
give the signal.
After back to auto status or power recovery, the signal will be stopped.

Terminals
Load shedding: 1 NO + 1 NC
• NO: LS1-LS4
• NC: LS1-LS2
When load shedding initiates, NC terminal will open, and NO terminal will close.
For status output: 1 NO
• NO: AW1-AW2
When availability warning initiates, NO terminal will close.

DIO:LS/AW
TPCDIO05

LS2 LS1 LS4

1.1 1.2 1.3


Load shedding

AW1 AW2
LS2 LS1 LS4

2.1 2.3 AW1 AW2

Warning

Signal Type
Digital output.

DOCA0214EN–01 53
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 300 V
Maximum output voltage 250 Vac,50/60 Hz or 30 Vdc

Maximum output current 5A

Over voltage category III

Pollution degree 3

Altitude 2000 m

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).

54 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Transfer Inhibit and Remote Testing


The transfer inhibit and remote testing is an accessory module installed on
TransferPacT Automatic and TransferPacT Active Automatic controller with
following functions:
• Transfer inhibit, 1 NO dry contact is provided.
• Remote testing, 1 NO dry contact is provided.
• Green LED on the top of the accessory indicates the power status and proper
connection of the accessory.
• Communication with the main MCU on TSE.
• Only one transfer inhibit and remote testing is allowed to be installed on one
product.

Application Transfer Inhibit


• Transfer Inhibit when there is power interruption because of short circuit.
• This function can be used to lock the controller by customized signals.
• This function can be used for cooperation with different ATSE.
• Remove transfer inhibit signal to exit this mode.

Application Remote Testing


• Remote testing is an input signal to start test procedure.
• The remote test can only be started at Auto mode.
• For Active Automatic HMI, on load, off load test and time duration can be
selected
• For Automatic HMI, on load test is unlimited. Stop the test manually by
opening the dielectric switch on ATSE, and it should be back in run position to
resume the controller function.

Terminals
For transfer inhibit: 1 input
• Inputs : TI1-TI2
For remote testing: 1 input
• Inputs : RT1-RT2

1.1 1.3 TPCDIO07

TI1 RT1

Inhibit Test
TI2 RT2 TI1 RT1

2.1 2.3
TI2 RT2

Signal Type
• Digital input with dry contact
• Need over 200 ms input to start transfer inhibit and remote test

DOCA0214EN–01 55
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 30 V dc
Maximum Input current 5 mA

Altitude 2000 m

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).

56 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

BUS Extension and 24 VDC Auxiliary Supply


The BUS extension and 24 VDC auxiliary supply is an accessory module installed
on TransferPacT Active Automatic controller with following functions:
• Bus extension, 1 RJ45 is provided.
• DC 24 V and 1 input is provided.
• Green LED on the front face of the accessory indicates the power status and
proper connection of the accessory.
• Communication with the main MCU on TSE.
• Only one BUS extension and DC 24 V auxiliary supply is allowed to be
installed on one product, in the right most slot.

Application BUS Extension


BUS extension is used to connect external HMI.

Application with DC 24 V
• External power for controller when both source failure.
• External power to keep power for Modbus communication when both source
failure.

Terminals
For BUS Extension
• RJ45
DC 24 V
• 24V+, 24V-

DIO:CE/EP
TPCDIO15

24V
/ 24V
DC24V

1.1 1.3 24V


/ 24V

Bus extension

Signal Type
Power supply and bus extension.

DOCA0214EN–01 57
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 30 Vdc
Maximum Input voltage 28.8 Vdc

Minimum input voltage 19.2 Vdc

Maximum input current 1A

Pollution degree 3

Altitude 2000 m
RJ45 CAT 3

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are as below:
• The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).
• RJ45

58 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Fire Protections 24 V DC Pulse Input


The fire protection is an accessory module installed on TransferPacT Automatic
and TransferPacT Active Automatic controller with following functions:
• Exit the auto transfer mode and transfer the switch to OFF according to input
signal.
• Fire protection with input of DC 24 V pulse signal.
• Green LED on the front face of the accessory indicates the power status and
proper connection of the accessory.
• The main MCU on TSE communication through CAN bus.
• Only one module is allowed to be installed on one product.

Application
When there is fire emergency, the fire protection signal can transfer ATSE to off
position.

Terminals
• Fire protection with DC 24 V Pulse:
◦ Start: P1+.P1-
◦ Exit: P2+,P2-

DIO:F
TPCDIO10

1.1 1.3
DC24V Pulse
Enable
P1+ P1-
P1+ P1-

Disable

P2+ P2-
P2+ P2-

2.1 2.3

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 30 V dc
Maximum input voltage (Fire ENABLE) 28.8 V dc

Minimum input voltage (Fire ENABLE) 19.2 V dc

Maximum input voltage (Fire DISABLE) 28.8 V dc

Minimum input voltage (Fire DISABLE) 19.2 V dc

Maximum input current 10 mA

Over voltage category II

Pollution Degree 3

Altitude 2000 m

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).

DOCA0214EN–01 59
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Fire Protection 24 V DC Constant Input


The fire protection is an accessory module installed on TransferPacT Automatic
and TransferPacT Active Automatic controller with following functions:
• Exit the auto transfer mode and transfer the switch to OFF according to input
signal.
• Fire protection with input of DC24V constant signal.
• Green LED on the front face of the accessory indicates the power status and
proper connection of the accessory.
• The main MCU on TSE communication through CAN bus.
• Only one module is allowed to be installed on one product.

Application
When there is fire emergency, the fire protection signal can transfer ATSE to off
position.

Terminals
• Fire protection with DC24V constant signal:
◦ C1+.C1-

DIO:F
TPCDIO11

DC24V constant

C1+ C1-
1.1 1.3

C1+ C1-

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 30 V dc
Maximum input voltage (Fire ENABLE) 28.8 V dc

Minimum input voltage (Fire ENABLE) 19.2 V dc

Maximum input current 10 mA

Over voltage category II

Pollution Degree 3

Altitude 2000 m

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).

60 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Fire Protection 230 V AC Constant Input


The fire protection is an accessory module installed on TransferPacT Automatic
and TransferPacT Active Automatic controller with following functions:
• Exit the auto transfer mode and transfer the switch to OFF according to input
signal.
• Fire protection with input of AC230V constant.
• Green LED on the front face of the accessory indicates the power status and
proper connection of the accessory.
• The main MCU on TSE communication through CAN bus.
• Only one module is allowed to be installed on one product.

Application
When there is fire emergency, the fire protection signal can transfer ATSE to off
position.

Terminals
• Fire protection with input of AC230V constant.
◦ C1+.C1-

DIO:F
TPCDIO13

AC230V constant

C1+ C1-

1.1 1.3

C1+ C1-

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 300 V
Maximum input voltage (Fire ENABLE) 276 V ac

Minimum input voltage (Fire ENABLE) 184 V ac

Maximum input current 10 mA

Over voltage category II

Pollution Degree 3

Altitude 2000 m

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).

DOCA0214EN–01 61
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Fire Protection Dry Contact Input


The fire protection is an accessory module installed on TransferPacT Automatic
and TransferPacT Active Automatic controller with following functions:
• Exit the auto transfer mode and transfer the switch to OFF according to input
signal.
• Fire protection with 1 dry contact input.
• Green LED on the front face of the accessory indicates the power status and
proper connection of the accessory.
• The main MCU on TSE communication through CAN bus.
• Only one module is allowed to be installed on one product.

Application
When there is fire emergency, the fire protection signal can transfer ATSE to off
position.

Terminals
• Fire protection with 1 dry contact input:
◦ W1.W2

DIO:F
TPCDIO14

1.2

W1 Dry contact

W1

W2

W2

2.2

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 30 Vdc
Minimum input current 5 mA

Altitude 2000 m

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).

62 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Modbus RTU (Serial Port)


The modbus is an accessory module installed on TransferPacT Active Automatic
controller with following functions::
• Modbus RTU communication supporting MODBUS protocol.
• Indicate the com status of the accessory by using a yellow LED on top of the
accessory.
• Green LED on the front face of the accessory indicates the power status and
proper connection of the accessory.
• Communication with the main MCU on TSE.
• Support communication transfer.
• Two Modbus are allowed to be installed on one product.

Application Modbus
Modbus can be used to connect with other system. It require external 24 V or at
least one main source to keep the communication with protocol Modbus RTU.
For a cable length up to 300 m (1.000 ft), it is mandatory to use a shielded twisted
cable. The shield of cable is connected to the shield terminal.

Terminals Modbus
• Modbus:
◦ D1, D0, 0V, Shield

COM:Modbus
TPCCOM16

1.1 1.2 1.3

D1 D0 0V

Shield

2.1 2.2 2.3

Signal Type
Serial port.

Performance
Electrical Characteristics Ratings

Ui 30 Vdc
Baud Rate (KBS) 4.8\9.6\19.2

Over voltage category III

Pollution degree 3

Altitude 2000 m

DOCA0214EN–01 63
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.05 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 30 ~ 13).

Limitation of Accessories
Type Max

DI-Fire (Including 4 fire type) 1

DI-Inhibit 1
DI-Voluntary 1

DI-Inhibit and test 1


DO-Load shedding and availability 1

DO-Genset start and alarm 1


Modbus 2

TransferPacT Active Automatic TransferPacT Automatic

12
10 6 714
5
Impossible f 50Hz 60Hz
230 240
U 8

6 3
4 8 16
9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t
2 20
(N A 1 30
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60
5 10
3
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N 1 30
0 (min) 60

Possible

TPCDIO05 DO(Load Shedding and Availability)

TPCDIO07 DI (Inhibit and Test)

TPCDIO08 DI (Voluntary)

TPCDIO10 Fire Protection (24 V Pulse)

TPCDIO11 Fire Protection (24 V Constant)

TPCDIO13 Fire Protection (230 V Constant)

TPCDIO14 Fire Protection (dry contact)

TPCDIO15 BUS Extension and 24VDC Auxiliary


Supply

TPCCOM16 Modbus RTU (Serial Port)

TPCDIO17 DO (Genset Start and Alarm)

64 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Input and Output Terminal Functions for RTSE


Overview
TransferPacT Remote provides transfer solutions with input and output terminals.

P1 P0 P2 Marking

Terminals

SI SII O

C
R1 R2 R3 R0 Marking

Terminals

The details of the input and output terminals are shown below:

Terminals Marking Definition

Product Availability P0 Common Terminal for P1, P2

P1 Output signal, when either source voltage is in range and


product is NOT in manual mode, NO terminal will close.

P2 Output signal, when either source voltage is in range and


product is NOT in manual mode, NC terminal will open.

Remote Transfer R0 Common Terminal for R1, R2, R3

R1 Passive input signal, remote transfer to position I when closed


with R0 and last for at least 200 ms.
R2 Passive input signal, remote transfer to position II when closed
with R0 and last for at least 200 ms.
R3 Passive input signal, remote transfer to position O when closed
with R0 and last for at least 200 ms.

DOCA0214EN–01 65
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A TransferPacT Controller

Product Availability
Product availability is a fixed function for TransferPacT remote with following
functions:
• Dry contact output which can provide the product availability state.
• One NO and one NC are provided.

Application
When either source is in range, and transfer switch equipment is not in manual
mode, the normal open contact will close, normal closed contact will open. The
table below lists the supported voltage deviation range for RTSE.

Rated voltage Supported voltage range


of RTSE
380–440 V 274 - 517 V
208–240 V 174 - 280 V

When both sources are out of range, product availability function is not available.
Refer to table below for the voltage out of range.

Rated voltage Voltage out of range


of RTSE
380–440 V ≤ 263 V or ≥ 534 V
208–240 V ≤ 163 V or ≥ 291 V

NOTE:
• Alarm indicator is on (Red LED) when there is a transfer failure or internal
failure. When it’s on, document this alarm and reach out field service.
Then reset RTSE through dielectric switch, and alarm indicator will go off.
• Run status indicator is on when either source is in range and transfer
switch equipment is not in manual mode.

Terminals
For product availability: 1 NO + 1 NC:
• NO: P1-P0
• NC: P2-P0
When either source is in range and product is not in manual mode, NC terminal
will open, and NO terminal will close.

Signal type
• Digital output with dry contact.
• 5A/250VAC. 5A/30VDC.

P1 P0 P2

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.5 – 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24 ~ 12).
Maximum cable length: 10 m

66 DOCA0214EN–01
TransferPacT Controller Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Remote Transfer
The Remote transfer is a fixed function for TransferPacT remote with following
functions:
• Remote transfer is an active input. It can transfer the TSE to source I or
source II or OFF position according to input signals. There’s no time delay, no
source detection for remote transfer.
• Customer should give a rising edge signal, and keep the signal for no less
than 200 ms to start remote transfer.

Electrical wiring
Remote Remote Remote
to S1 to S2 to OFF

R1 R2 R3

R0 R0 R0

Terminals
There are 4 terminals of the remote transfer function as below:
• R0-R1: Remote to SI
• R0-R2: Remote to SII
• R0-R3: Remote to OFF

Signal type
• Digital input with dry contact.
• Need over 200 ms input to start remote control.
SI SII O

R1 R2 R3 R0

Cable Capacity for Terminals


The cable capacity for the terminals are 0.5 – 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24 ~ 12).
Maximum cable length: 10 m

DOCA0214EN–01 67
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

Installation
What’s in This Chapter
Mounting the Switch on Plate for Frame 100: 32-100 A and Frame 160: 80–
160 A ...........................................................................................................69
Mounting the Switch on Plate for Frame 250: 100-250 A and Frame 630:
320–630 A ....................................................................................................71
Mounting the Switch on DIN Rail for Frame 100: 32-100 A................................73
Mounting the Switch on DIN Rail for Frame 160: 80–160 A ...............................74
Front Door Cutout..........................................................................................75
Installation of Controller Function Module........................................................76
Replacement of Controller Function Module ....................................................80
Mounting of External HMI...............................................................................85

68 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Mounting the Switch on Plate for Frame 100: 32-100 A and


Frame 160: 80–160 A
Perform the following procedure to mount the switch on the plate.
1. Drill four holes on the mounting plate for screws.
2. Place the switch on the plate.
3. Tighten the four screws at the right torque.

X
b

4xc Y

M4x10
2 0.7±0.05 N•m
6.19±0.44 lb-in.

d 3
x4
ferPacT
Trans

Auto
12 14
10 6 7 16 SII
5 8

U
84 9 18 SI

PZ1/PZ2

Switch a b c d Type of screws Torque

Frame 100: 32– 291 mm 134 mm 4.6 mm < 3 mm (0.1 in.) M4 x 10 0.7±0.05 N•m
100 A (11.45 in.) (5.27 in.) (0.18 in.) (6.19±0.44 lb-in.)

Frame 160: 80– 284 mm 136 mm 4.6 mm < 3 mm (0.1 in.) M4 x 50 1.5±0.1 N•m
160 A (11.18 in.) (5.35 in.) (0.18 in.) (13.28±0.88 lb-
in.)

DOCA0214EN–01 69
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

90° 90°

(A
t
N 1
2
0 (min) 60

3
10
30
20
180°

SI
SII

TransferPacT
Auto
Auto
TransferPacT

SII
SI
TransferPacT

SI SII
Auto
Auto
SII SI

0 (min) 60
TransferPacT

NOTE: Screws, slices, and nuts are delivered with the switch.

70 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Mounting the Switch on Plate for Frame 250: 100-250 A


and Frame 630: 320–630 A
Perform the following procedure to mount the switch on the plate.
1. Drill five holes on the mounting plate for screws.
2. Place the switch on the plate.
3. Tighten the four mounting screws at the right torque.
4. Connect the protective earth cable to the protective earth hole.

a
1

4x c

< S II

<SI

e 2

OF/AUX

SII
atic
Autom
SI

30 4TPE
D4S6
TA63
0Hz
50/6
V
80V-440 A/0.1s
,25k
Ue: AC3 /0.5s
20kA
Ie: 630A Icw: 7-6-1 d
0005
AC-33B 0301 EN 6094 < Loa
12 14 No. 2204 11 IEC/
10 6 7 16 048.
5 8
GB/T14
9 18
20
) 10
2 (
5 10
3 20
30
60
0 (s)
5 10
3 20
30
60
0 (min)

M6x20 7±0.7 N•m


61.9±6.19 lb-in.

3
x4

PZ2/PZ3

DOCA0214EN–01 71
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

SI

SI
I

4
TA
63
D4
S6
Ie: 30
630 4T
AC A
-33 PE
No B Ue
. : AC
GB 220 OF
/T1 403 Icw: 380 /AU
404 010 20k V-4 X
8.1 005 A/0 40V
1 IEC .5s
,25 50/
/EN kA/ 60H
609 0.1
47- s z
6-1
Au
tom
atic

M6

Switch a b c d e Type of Torque


screws
Frame 250: 196±0.5 mm 325.5±0.5 mm 7±0.2 mm 75 mm < 8 mm M6 x 20 7±0.7 N•m
100–250 A (7.72±0.02 in.) (12.81±0.02 (0.28±0.008 (2.95 in.) (0.31 in.) (61.95±6.19
in.) in.) lb-in.)

Frame 630: 230±0.5 mm 325.5±0.5 mm 7±0.2 mm 22 mm < 8 mm M6 x 20 7±0.7 N•m


320–630 A (9.05±0.02 in.) (12.81±0.02 (0.28±0.008 (0.86 in.) (0.31 in.) (61.95±6.19
in.) in.) lb-in.)

< S II
< Load

<SI
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1
No. 220403010005
AC-33B Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
Ie: 630A Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz
0 (min) 60
30 N 1 (A Return Return
t
Automatic TA63D4S6304TPE

OF/AUX

SI SII

180°
SII SI

OF/AUX

TA63D4S6304TPE Automatic

Ie: 630A Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz


AC-33B Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1
<SI

< Load
< S II

NOTE: Screws, slices, and nuts are delivered with the switch.

72 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Mounting the Switch on DIN Rail for Frame 100: 32-100 A


Perform the following procedure to mount the switch on the DIN rail.
1. Insert the latch on the TSE.
2. Move the latch downwards using screwdriver having sufficient space to install
DIN rail.
3. Place the switch on the DIN rail.
4. Move the latch upwards using screwdriver to lock the DIN rail.
mm
in.

1 35
1.37
2
x2
cT
ferPa
Trans

Auto

2 3 60Hz 230
SI
SII

50Hz 400
f 5s 220
0s 380
G
t Off Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
(A 0 (min

x2
4

DOCA0214EN–01 73
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

Mounting the Switch on DIN Rail for Frame 160: 80–160 A


Perform the following procedure to mount the overload relays on the DIN rail.
1. Insert the spring into the latch.
2. Insert the latch into the TSE and move downwards.
3. Insert the screw into the latch.
4. Place the TSE on the DIN rail.
mm
in.

35
1.37

1 x2
c test is
done
mati Insulation wrong
Auto in factory test will .
dielectircthe controller
damage
TPE transition
440V
1604
D4SATSE Open 380V~
TA16 A Ue:AC s
Ie:160 kA/0.1
PacT Icw:10
0020
Transfer No:20
31205

x2 10
12 14
6 7 16
8 SII
uto

2 4
9 18

10 20
SI
10
20
30
60
f
10
20
t 30
60
Mode
N
Prio.

!
Click

x2

74 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Front Door Cutout


The front door should be cut as per the below dimensions for TransferPacT Active
Automatic and Automatic switches. The dimensions are provided in millimeters
and inches.

in
is done c
atic n test

Autom
Insulatio wrong dielectir
factory damage the
test will r.
n controlle
PE n transitio0V
S1604T
E OpeC380V~44
TA16D4 ATS Ue:A
Ie:16
0A
/0.1s
10kA
Icw:20
erPacT 0500
Transf No:2
0312

12 14
10 6 7 16
5 8 SII
84 9 18
U
6 3 20 SI
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G )
t Off Ue(V 2 30
t
e N 1 60
Mod SII (A 0 (min)
SI
N Non
Prio. rn
Auto Retu
rn
Retu

SII

SI
atic
Autom

PE
504T
D4S2 z
TA25 0V
50/60H
.1s
380-44 15kA/0
10
12 14
6 7 16 Ue: AC A/0.5s,
A 10k
Icw:
5 8
84 9 18 Ie: 250B 6-1
U
6 3 AC-33 403010
002 60947-
IEC/EN
20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10 No. 2204048.11
240
60Hz GB/T1
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t
440 1 60
A
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G )
t Off Ue(V 2 30
t
e N 1 60
Mod SII (A 0 (min)
SI
N Non
Prio. rn
Auto Retu
rn
Retu

X
b

Y
c
a

Switch a b c d
Frame 100: 32–100 A 307 mm (12.1 in.) 46 mm (1.80 in.) 153.5 mm (6.05 in.) 23 mm (0.9 in.)

Frame 160: 80–160 A 352 mm (13.85 in.) 46 mm (1.80 in.) 176 mm (6.92 in.) 23 mm (0.9 in.)

Frame 250: 100-250 A 329 mm (12.95 in.) 117 mm (4.60 in.) 164 mm (6.45 in.) 58 mm (2.28 in.)

Frame 630: 320-630 A 370 mm (14.56 in.) 117 mm (4.60 in.) 184.5 mm (7.26 in.) 58 mm (2.28 in.)

DOCA0214EN–01 75
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

Installation of Controller Function Module

NOTICE
INOPERABLE FUNCTION MODULES
Do not install the function module unless the dielectric switch is in test position.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in failure of function
module.

Installing Controller Function Module for Frame 100: 32–100 A


and Frame 160: 80–160 A
Perform the following procedure to install the controller function module:
1. Put the controller on handle mode.
2. Open the dielectric switch from run to test using screwdriver.
3. Pull out the dielectric switch.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the dummy module.
5. Twist the screwdriver.
6. Remove the dummy module and store it for future use.
7. Open the controller function module from the package.
8. Open the front cover of the function module.
9. Insert the function module into the switch.
10. Close the function module cover after wiring. For more information on wiring,
refer to Wiring of Function Modules, page 90.
11. Change the dielectric switch position from Test to Run using screwdriver.

76 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

TransferPacT

SI SII
Auto

2 90°

T
erPac
Transf N

al
Manu
12 14
12 14
10 6 7 16 SII
SII
5 8

U
84 9 18 SI
SI
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G )
t Off Ue(V 2 30
t
e N 1 60
Mod SII (A 0 (min)
SI
N Non
Prio. rn
Auto Retu
rn
Retu

6
x5

4 x5
x5 5

90°

11
x5
7
x5
8
T
erPac
Transf
T
erPac
Manu
al Transf
12 14
10 6 7 16 SII
SII
5 8

U
84 9 18 SI
SI
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3

Auto
20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 60

SII
A
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G )
t Off Ue(V 2 30
t
Mod
e SII (A
N 1
0 (min)
60
SI
SI
N Non
Prio. rn
Auto Retu
rn
Retu

9
x5

10
x5

DOCA0214EN–01 77
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

Installing Controller Function Module for Frame 250: 100–250 A


and Frame 630: 320–630 A
Perform the following procedure to replace the controller function module for
frame 250: 100–250 A and Frame 630: 320–630 A:
1. Put the controller on handle mode.
2. Open the dielectric switch from run to test using screwdriver.
3. Pull out the dielectric switch.
4. Open the flip cover of the function module slots.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the dummy module.
6. Twist the screwdriver.
7. Remove the dummy module and store it for future use.
8. Open the controller function module from the package.
9. Open the controller function module cover.
10. Insert the controller function module into the switch.
11. Close the function module cover after wiring. For more information on wiring,
refer to Wiring of Function Modules, page 90

78 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

< S II

<SI

SI SII

OF/AUX

TA63D4S6304TPE Automatic

4
Ie: 630A Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz
AC-33B Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

< Load
SII

SI

1 TA63D

Ie: 630A
AC-3
3B
4S6304

Ue: AC3 /0.5s


Icw:
20kA
0005
0301 IEC/EN 6094
TPE

440V

7-6-1
50/6
80V- ,25kA/0.1
s
0Hz

No. 2204 8.11


1404
GB/T

60Hz
50Hz
f 5s

SII
0s
t Off

Mode SII
SI
N Non
n
Prio.
Auto Retur
n
Retur

SI

< S II

<SI

10
5
84
U
6 3
f 4 2
240 3
60Hz 230 415 2
400 250
50Hz 440
t 1
f 5s 220 (N
A
0
0s 380 3
)

x5 5
t Off
G
Ue(V 2

3
t
e N 1
OF/AUX
Mod SII (A 0

7
SI
N Non
Prio. rn
Auto Retu
rn
Retu
SII
x5 Autom
atic

2 90°
SI

TPE
4S6304
TA63D
0Hz
50/6
440V s
80V- ,25kA/0.1
Ue: AC3 /0.5s
20kA
Ie: 630A Icw: 7-6-1 d
3B 0005
AC-3 0301 IEC/EN 6094 < Loa
No. 2204 8.11
1404
GB/T

6 x5

x5
8

9
x5

< S II

<SI

OF/AUX

x5 10 SI
SII
Autom
atic

TPE
4S6304

11
TA63D
0Hz
50/6
440V s
80V- ,25kA/0.1
Ue: AC3 /0.5s
20kA
Ie: 630A Icw: 7-6-1 d
3B 0005
0301 IEC/EN 6094 < Loa
SII
AC-3
No. 2204 8.11
1404
GB/T

SI
x5

DOCA0214EN–01 79
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

Replacement of Controller Function Module


Replacing Function Module for Frame 100: 32–100 A and Frame
160: 80–160 A
Perform the following procedure to replace the controller function module for
frame 100: 32–100 A and frame 160: 80–160 A:
1. Put the controller on handle mode.
2. Open the dielectric switch from run to test using screwdriver.
3. Pull out the dielectric switch.
4. Open the front cover of function module.
5. Loosen the terminal of the function module using screwdriver.
6. Remove the wiring.
7. Pull out the function module.
8. Take out the new function module from the packaging box.
9. Open the front cover of the function module.
10. Insert the function module into the TransferPacT switch.
11. Insert the wire into the function module terminal.
12. Lock the terminal using screwdriver.
13. Close the front cover of the function module.
14. Change the dielectric switch position from Test to Run using screwdriver.

80 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

TransferPacT

SI SII
Auto

1
atic
Autom

TPE
4S0634
TA10D A
ive
Active
Act
Icw:5K oller.
contr
ge the

fer PacT test


will dama

Trans
ctirc
g diele
wron
ry
in facto
is done
N ation
test
Insul

Auto
SII
12 14
SI
10 6 7 16 SII
5 8

U
84 9 18 SI
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20

3
G
t Off Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (A 0 (min
SI
N Non
Prio.
Auto Return
Return

2 90°
atic
Autom

4S0634
5TPE
TA10D A
ive
Active
Act
Icw:5K oller.
contr
ge the
cT
ferPa
will dama
test

Trans
ctirc
g diele
wron
ry
in facto
is done

4
test
ation
Insul

SII
Auto 6
SI

7
PacT
Transfer N

l
Manua
12 14
10 6 7 16 SII
SII
5 8

U
84 9 18 SISI
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240 3 20
60Hz 230 415 2
400 250 30
50Hz 440
t 1 60
A
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G
t Off Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 60
Mode SII (A 0 (min)
SI
N Non
n
atic
Prio.
Auto Retur
n
Retur
Autom

4S0 634TPE
TA10D A
ive
Active
Act
Icw:5K oller.
contr
ge the
PacT will dama

nsfer
test
ctirc
Tra in facto
ry
wron
g diele

is done
test
ation
Insul

Auto
SII
SI

90°

12 0.6±0.1 N•m
14 5.31±0.88 lb-in.

11
9 mm
Autom
atic

TPE
4S0634
in. TA10D
Icw:5K
A
ive
Active
Act
oller.
PacT contr
Transfer ge the
cT
ferPa
will dama
test

Trans
ctirc
g diele
wron
l ry
Manua in facto
12 14 is done
10 6 7 16 SII
SII test
5 8 ation

8
84 9 18 SISI Insul
U
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10

Auto
240 3 20
60Hz 230 415 2
250 30

0.31SII 0.05-2.6 mm²


400
50Hz 440
t 1 60
A
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G
t Off Ue(V) 2 30

Mode SII (A
t
N 1
0 (min)
60 SI
SI

30-13 AWG
N Non
n
Prio.

8
Auto Retur
n
Retur

10

13

DOCA0214EN–01 81
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

Replacing Function Module for Frame 250: 100–250 A and Frame


630: 320–630 A
Perform the following procedure to replace the controller function module for
frame 250: 100–250 A and frame 630: 320–630 A:
1. Put the controller on handle mode.
2. Open the dielectric switch position from Run to Test using screwdriver.
3. Pull out the dielectric switch.
4. Open the flip cover of the function module slots.
5. Open the front cover of function module.
6. Loosen the terminal of the function module using screwdriver.
7. Remove the wiring.
8. Pull out the function module.
9. Take out the new function module from the packaging box.
10. Open the front cover of the function module.
11. Insert the function module into the TransferPacT switch.
12. Insert the wire into the function module terminal.
13. Lock the terminal using screwdriver.
14. Close the front cover of the function module.
15. Change the dielectric switch position from Test to Run using screwdriver.

82 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

< S II

<SI

SI SII

OF/AUX

TA63D4S6304TPE Automatic

Ie: 630A
AC-33B
Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz
Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1 4
< Load SII

SI

1 TA63

Ie: 630A
D4S6

AC-33B 0301
No. 2204
GB/T14
048.
Ue:
Icw:
304T

0005
11 IEC/
PE

20kA
/0.5s

EN 6094
,25k
A/0.1s

7-6-1

SII

SI

< S II

12
<SI 10 6 7
5
84
U
6 3
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3
230 415 2
400 250
50Hz 440
t 1 60
f 5s 220 (N
A
0 (s)
380 5 10

3
0s 3
)
t Off
G
Ue(V 2
t
e N 1 in) 60
Mod SII (A 0 (m
SI
N Non
Prio. rn
Auto Retu
rn
Retu

2 90°
OF/AUX

SII
atic
Autom
SI

PE
304T
D4S6
TA63
0Hz
50/6
V
80V-440 A/0.1s
,25k
Ue: AC3 /0.5s
20kA
Ie: 630A Icw: 7-6-1 d
0005
AC-33B 0301 EN 6094 < Loa
No. 2204 11 IEC/
048.
GB/T14

6
x5
5 SII 7
SI
x5 x5 SI
SII

8 x5
SII

SI

DOCA0214EN–01 83
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

x5
9

10
x5

mm
in.

8
0.31 0.05-2.6 mm²
30-13 AWG

0.6±0.1 N•m
5.31±0.88 lb-in.
x5 11 SI
SII

13 TA63

Ie: 630A
D4S6

AC-33B 0301
No. 2204
304T

Icw:
20kA
0005
PE

/0.5s
,25k
A/0.1s

x5
048.
GB/T14

12
x5 SI
SII

90°

14 SII

SI
x5 15

84 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Mounting of External HMI


External HMI
Perform the following procedure to install the external HMI on the front panel door.
1. Rotate the external HMI to the back side.
2. Remove the nut of external HMI.
3. Insert the external HMI on the front panel door.
NOTE: Please make the cutout on the front door as per the dimension
given.
4. Insert the nut.
5. Lock the nut.

180° 2

rPacT
Transfe

Auto

2±0.2 N•m
17.7±1.77 lb-in.
5

DOCA0214EN–01 85
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation

External HMI and IP54 Cover


Perform the following procedure to install the external HMI and IP54 cover on the
front panel door.
1. Rotate the external HMI to the back side.
2. Remove the nut of the external HMI.
3. Remove the screws of IP54 cover by using screwdriver.
4. Open the IP54 front cover.
5. Insert the external HMI into the IP54 cover.
6. Close the IP54 front cover.
7. Tighten the screws of IP54 cover by using the screw driver.
8. Insert the external HMI and IP54 cover on the front panel door.
NOTE: Please make the cutout on the front door as per the dimension
given.
9. Insert the nut.
10. Lock the nut.

86 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

180°

1 2

x4
M4x8
3

PZ1/PZ2

0.7±0.05 N•m
6.2±0.44 lb-in.
5

4
x4
7
6

PacT
2±0.2 N•m
Transfer

Auto 17.7±1.77 lb-in.


10

DOCA0214EN–01 87
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

Wiring
What’s in This Chapter
Wiring Precautions ........................................................................................89
Wiring of Function Modules ............................................................................90
Wiring of Auxiliary Contacts............................................................................97
Wiring of Input and Output Terminals ............................................................ 101
Wiring of External HMI ................................................................................. 104
Wiring Diagrams for Frame 100: 32–100 A .................................................... 106
Wiring Diagrams for Frame 160: 80–160 A .................................................... 108
Wiring Diagrams for Frame 250: 100–250 A and Frame 630: 320–630
A................................................................................................................ 109

88 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Wiring Precautions
Read and understand the following precautions before performing any procedures
in this guide.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe
electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, CSA Z462,NOM 029-STPS or
local equivalent.
• This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical
personnel.
• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on this
equipment.
• Use only the specified voltage when operating this equipment and any
associated products.
• Power line circuits must be wired and protected in compliance with local and
national regulatory requirements.
• Beware of potential hazards, and carefully inspect the work area for tools
and objects that may have been left inside the equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
FIRE HAZARD
• Use only the specified wiring gauge range with the equipment and comply
with the specified wire termination requirements.
• Tighten the power line connections to the specified torque values.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Always route communication wiring and power wiring separately.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

DOCA0214EN–01 89
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

Wiring of Function Modules


This section describes the function modules wiring accessories of the
TransferPacT Active Automatic 32-160 A and TransferPacT Automatic 32-160 A
transfer switch equipment.

TPCDIO05 : Load Shedding and Availability Warning


Wiring Diagram

LS2 LS1 LS4

AW1 AW2

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

TPCDIO07 : Transfer Inhibit with Remote Testing


Wiring Diagram
TI1 RT1

TI2 RT2

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

90 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

TPCDIO08: Voluntary Remote Control


Wiring Diagram
V1 V2 F1

V0 V0 V0

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

TPCDIO10 : Fire Protection 24 Vdc Pulse Input


Wiring Diagram

P1+ P1-

P2+ P2-

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

TPCDIO11 : Fire Protection 24 Vdc Constant Input


Wiring

C1+ C1-

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

DOCA0214EN–01 91
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

TPCDIO13 : Fire Protection 230 Vac Constant Input


Wiring
1.1 1.3

C1+ C1-

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

TPCDIO14 : Fire Protection 1 Dry Contact Input


Wiring
W1

W2

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

92 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

TPCDIO15 : BUS Extension and 24 Vdc Auxiliary Supply


Wiring
24V+ 24V-
+/-

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

NOTE:
• TPCDIO15 is used only for TransferPacT Active Automatic.
• To get the best performance, TPCDIO15 need to install on the rightmost
slot for frame 100 and 160, and on the top slot for frame 250 and 630.

atic
Autom

PE
634T
D4S0
TA10 A
tive
Active
Ac
Icw:5K oller.
contr
ge the
cT
ferPa test
will dama

Trans
ctirc
g diele
wron
ry
in facto
is done
test
ation
Insul

Auto
SII
SI

atic atic
Autom Autom

PE PE
634T 634T
D4S0 D4S0
TA10 A
tive
Active
Ac TA10 A Ac tive
Active
Icw:5K oller.
Icw:5K oller.
contr contr
ge the ge the
PacT cT cT
nsfer
test
will dama
ferPa test
will dama
ferPa
Trans Trans
ctirc ctirc
Tra in facto
ry
wron
g diele

in facto
ry
wron
g diele

is done is done
test test
ation ation
Insul Insul

Auto Auto
SII SII SII
SI SI SI

atic atic
Autom Autom

PE PE
634T 634T
D4S0 D4S0
TA10 Ac tive
Active TA10 A Active
Active
A
Icw:5K Icw:5K oller.
oller. contr
contr
ge the
PacT
ge the
cT will dama
ferPa test
will dama
nsfer
test

Trans
ctirc ctirc

ry
wron
g diele
Tra in facto
ry
wron
g diele

in facto
is done is done
test test
ation ation
Insul Insul

Auto Auto
SII SII
SI SI

DOCA0214EN–01 93
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

TPCCOM16 : ModBus (RTU)


Wiring

D1 D0 0V

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

NOTE: TPCCOM16 is used only for TransferPacT Active Automatic.

TPCDIO17 : Genset Start and Alarm


Wiring

G2 G1 G4

A1 A2

Terminal

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

94 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Wiring Procedure for Frame 100: 32–100 A and Frame 160: 80–160
A
Perform the following wiring procedure of function modules:
1. Open the function module cover.
2. Insert the wire into the function module terminal.
3. Tighten the screw terminal using screwdriver.
4. Close the function module cover.

T
rPac
Transfe

12 14
Auto
10 6 7 16 SII
5 8
9 18 SI
20
( ) 10
5 10
20
30
60
f (s)
5 10
20
t Off 30
) 60
Mode (min

N
Prio.

Return

c
mati
Auto

4T PE
S063
0D4
TA1 ivee
ctiv
Act
A
KA
Icw:5 oller.
contr
cT ge the
cT
ferPa ferPa
dama
t will

Trans Trans
lec tirc tes
g die
wron
fac tor y
ne in
is do
test
tion
Insula

Auto Auto
SII SII
SI SI

c
mati
Auto
E
34TP
4S06
TA 10D ivee
ctiv
A Act
A
Icw:5K oller.
contr
T ge the

fe rPac test
will dama

Trans
lectirc
g die
y wron
factor

1
ne in

Auto
Insula
tion
test
is do

4
SI
SII x5 x5

mm
in.

3 0.6±0.1 N•m
5.31±0.88 lb-in.

8
x5 0.31
x5
2 0.05-2.6 mm²
30-13 AWG

DOCA0214EN–01 95
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

Wiring Procedure for Frame 250: 100–250A and Frame 630: 320–
630A
Perform the following wiring procedure of function modules:
1. Open the function module cover.
2. Insert the wire into the function module terminal.
3. Tighten the screw terminal using screwdriver.
4. Close the controller function module cover.
5. Tighten the cable to module slot using cable zip tie.
6. Break the dummy cover using plier to route the wire.
NOTE: Dispose the dummy cover to avoid hazard accidents.

5 x5

SII
SII

SI

SI

1 SII
4 SII

SI
x5
SI
x5

mm
in.

x5 6 x5
3 8
0.31 0.05-2.6 mm²
30-13 AWG
2
x5 SI
SII

0.6±0.1 N•m
5.31±0.88 lb-in.

96 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Wiring of Auxiliary Contacts


Wiring Procedure for Frame 100: 32–100A and Frame 160: 80–
160A
Perform the following procedure for wiring the auxiliary contacts:
1. Remove the cover of auxiliary contacts.
2. Place the cable vertically on the top power terminals of the switch.
3. Tighten the screw terminals at the right torque.
4. Place the cable vertically on the bottom power terminals of the switch.
5. Tighten the screw terminals at the right torque.
6. Put the cover back on the auxiliary contacts.

1.4±0.1 N•m
12.39±0.88 lb-in.

1 3

cT cT
ferPa ferPa
Trans Trans

SI
SII
Auto

U
4 8
10
6
5 12 14 8
7

16
18
9
SI
SII
Auto
PZ2
3 6 10
) 20
f 2 4 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t
440 R 1 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (S)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G
t Off Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (R 0 (min
SI
N Non
Prio. Return
Auto
Return

1.4±0.1 N•m 6
12.39±0.88 lb-in.
Trans
ferPa
cT
5 Trans
ferPa
cT

Auto
SII 6 7
Auto
SI 5 12 14 8 SII
10 16
4 8 9
U 18 SI
3 6 10
) 20
f 2 4 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415

4
2
50Hz 400 250 30
t
440 R 1 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (S)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G
t Off Ue(V)

PZ2
2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (R 0 (min
SI
N Non
Prio. Return
Auto
Return

DOCA0214EN–01 97
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

Wiring Procedure for Frame 250: 100–250A and Frame 630: 320–
630A
Perform the following procedure for wiring the auxiliary contacts:
1. Place the cable vertically on the top power terminals of the switch.
2. Tighten the screw terminals at the right torque.
3. Place the cable vertically on the bottom power terminals of the switch.
4. Tighten the screw terminals at the right torque.

1
x2

2 x2
PZ2
1.4±0.1 N•m
12.39±0.88 lb-in.

98 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Wiring Diagram for Auxiliary Contact TPSAUX32 and TPSAUX43


Auxiliary Contact for Source Position
SI SI SII SII
open closed open closed

F12 F14 F22 F24

F1 F2

F11 F21

ATSE is closed at SI:


• F11-F14 is closed
• F11-F12 is opened
ATSE is closed at SII:
• F21-F24 is closed
• F21-F22 is opened
ATSE is at OFF position:
• F11-F12 and F21-F22 are closed
• F11-F14 and F21-F24 are opened

DOCA0214EN–01 99
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

Wiring Diagram for Auxiliary Contact TPSAUX33 and TPSAUX44


Auxiliary Contact for OFF Position

V a/c

F12 F14 F22 F24

F1 F2

F11 F21

ATSE is at OFF position: F12-F22 is closed.

a/c
V
F12 F22 F24
F14

F1 F2

F11
F21

ATSE is not at OFF position: F11-F14 and F21-F24 are closed.

100 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Wiring of Input and Output Terminals

DANGER
Before installation please pay attention to the dielectric switch is at Test
position.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

1. Pull out the module cover.


2. Remove the mounting screw from the connector using screwdriver.
3. Take out the connectors.
4. Loosen the screw on the connectors using screw driver.
5. Insert the wire into the connectors.
6. Tighten the screw using screwdriver at right torque.
7. Insert the connectors into the power module.
8. Tighten the screw using screwdriver at right torque.
9. Break the dummy cover using plier to route the wire.
NOTE: Dispose the dummy cover in the bin to avoid hazard accidents.
10. Close the module cover.
11. Press the dielectric switch button inwards using screw driver.
12. Change the dielectric switch position from Test to Run position using
screwdriver.
NOTE: Please pay attention and avoid wire clutter using cable zip tie

DOCA0214EN–01 101
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

< S II
2 x4

P1

P1
P0
<SI

P0
P2
P2

SI
R1

S II
R2

O
R3
R0
C
P1
P0

SI
R1
P2

S II
R2
R1

O
R2

R3
R3
1 3

R0
C
SII

x2
OF/AUX
Run
SI

te
Run Remo

4TPE
4R630 0Hz
TR63D V
50/6
80V-440 A/0.1s
Ue: AC3 /0.5s,25k
20kA
Ie: 630A Icw: 7-6-1 d
AC-33B 03010006 EN 6094 < Loa
No. 2204 11 IEC/
048.
GB/T14

SII

SI

12 14
10 6 7 16
5 8
84 9 18
U
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
400 250
50Hz
30

x7
t
440 1 60
f 5s 220 (N
A
0 (s)
0s 380 3
5 10
) 20
t Off
G
Ue(V 2 30

6
t
e N 1 in) 60
Mod SII (A 0 (m

4 x7
Prio.
N
Auto
Retu
SI

rn
Non
Retu
rn 5 x7

0.55±0.05 N•m
3.14±0.28 lb-in.

mm
in.

7
0.28 0.2-2.5 mm²
24-12 AWG

x2
7
P1
P0
P2

< S II
SI
R1

S II

<SI
R2

O
R3
R0
C

P1
P0
P2

SI
R1

S II
R2

10
R3
R0
C

9 x2 OF/AUX

SII
te
Run Remo
SI

4TPE
4R630 0Hz
TR63D V
50/6
80V-440 A/0.1s
Ue: AC3 /0.5s,25k
20kA
Ie: 630A Icw: 7-6-1 d
AC-33B 03010006 EN 6094 < Loa
No. 2204 11 IEC/
048.
GB/T14

x4
8

0.55±0.05 N•m
3.14±0.28 lb-in. 12
11 90°

102 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

< S II

<SI

P1
P0
P2

SI
R1

S II
R2

O
R3
R0
C
OF/AUX

SII
te
Run Remo
SI

4TPE
4R630 0Hz
TR63D V
50/6
80V-440 A/0.1s
Ue: AC3 /0.5s,25k
20kA
Ie: 630A Icw: 7-6-1 d
AC-33B 03010006 EN 6094 < Loa
No. 2204 11 IEC/
048.
GB/T14

DOCA0214EN–01 103
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

Wiring of External HMI


Overview
The external HMI is used to display the HMI on the panel. It's only supported on
TransferPacT Active Automatic transfer switch equipment. The HMI consists of
external HMI base and a LCD screen.
The external HMI must be connected with the function module with commercial
reference as TPCDIO15. The connection of the external HMI is done using a
cable and an external HMI base and LCD display.

Wiring External HMI to Frame 100: 32–100 A and Frame 160: 80–
160 A
Perform the following procedure to connect external HMI to the function module.
1. Insert the cable into the external HMI.
2. Insert the other end of the cable into the function module (TPCDIO15).

1
erPacT
Transf

Auto
SII
SI

TPCDIO15

104 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Wiring External HMI to Frame 250: 100–250 A and Frame 630:320–


630 A
Perform the following procedure to connect external HMI to the function module.
1. Insert the cable into the HMI display.
2. Open the flip cover of the function module slots.
3. Insert the other end of the cable into the function module (TPCDIO15).
4. Break the dummy cover using plier to route the wire.
5. Close the flip cover.

< S II
1
2 <SI

X
OF/AU
SII

SI

SII SII
mati
c
SI
Auto

PE
304T z Active

SI
D4L6 50/60H
TA63 V-440V A/0.1s
Ue: AC380 .5s,25k
20kA/0
Ie: 630A Icw: 6-1
010004 60947-
AC-33B
No. 220403
IEC/EN < Load
048.11
GB/T14

12 14
10 6 7 16
5 8
84 9 18
U
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G )
t Off Ue(V 2 30
t
e N 1 60
Mod SII (A 0 (min)
SI

3
N Non
Prio. rn
Auto Retu
rn
Retu

12 14
10 6 7 16
5 8
84 9 18
U
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240 3
60Hz 230 415 2
20

400 250 30
50Hz 440
t 1 60
f 5s 220 (N
A
0 (s)
0s 380 3
5 10
) 20
t Off
G
Ue(V 2 30
t
e N 1 in) 60
Mod SII (A 0 (m

TPCDIO15 Prio.
N
Auto
SI
Non
Retu
rn
rn
Retu

5
SII

SI

DOCA0214EN–01 105
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

Wiring Diagrams for Frame 100: 32–100 A


SII SI

1 Connect to SII

Connect to SI

f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4
10
5
12
6
7
14

8
16
2
230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20 TA10D4S0634TPE Automatic
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20 AC-33B Ie:63A Ue:AC380V~440V
(N A) 1 30 50/60Hz Icw:5kA/0.1s
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60 No.:20312050016
5 10
3 Active
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30 Insulation test is done in factory wrong dielectirc test will damage the controller.
0 (min) 60

Warning
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Please install the terminal cover correctly
after wiring to ensure the insulation distance.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in death or serious injury.

12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8 16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20
(N A) 1 30
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60
5 10
3
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30
0 (min) 60

Connect to Load
SII SI
O O 3
O I
I O

3P/4P
N A B C N A B C

SII SI

12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8 16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20 TA10D4S0634TPE Automatic
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20 AC-33B Ie:63A Ue:AC380V~440V
(N A) 1 30 50/60Hz Icw:5kA/0.1s
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60 No.:20312050016
5 10
3 GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1 Active
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30 Insulation test is done in factory wrong dielectirc test will damage the controller.
0 (min) 60

Warning
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Please install the terminal cover correctly
after wiring to ensure the insulation distance.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in death or serious injury.

12
10 14

f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4
6 3
5
6
7
8 16
9 18
Note: Customer can configure
230 240 f

Mode
t Off 0s 5s

G
220
380
400 415
250
440 2
4 2 (
3 5
) 10 20
10
20
phase sequence to A, B, C and N
t

Prio. N SI SII
Ue(V)
(N A) 1
0
3
30
(s) 60
5 10
through Active Automatic HMI
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30
0 (min) 60

106 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

2P
N L N L

SII SI

12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8
16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20 TA10D2S0633TPE Automatic
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20 AC-33B Ie:63A Ue:AC220V~250V
(N A) 1 30 50/60Hz Icw:5kA/0.1s
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60 No.:20312050013
5 10
3 Active
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30 Insulation test is done in factory wrong dielectirc test will damage the controller.
0 (min) 60

Warning
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Please install the terminal cover correctly
after wiring to ensure the insulation distance.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in death or serious injury.

12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8 16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20
(N A) 1 30
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60
5 10
3
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30
0 (min) 60

DOCA0214EN–01 107
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Wiring

Wiring Diagrams for Frame 160: 80–160 A


SII SI

2 Connect to SII

Connect to SI
1
12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8 16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20
(N A) 1 30 TA16D4S1604TPE Automatic
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60 ATSE Open transition
5 10 Insulation test is done
3 Ie:160A Ue:AC380V~440V in factory wrong
Auto Non t 2 20 Icw:10kA/0.1s dielectirc test will

Return Return (A N) 1 30
No:20312050020 damage the controller.

0 (min) 60

Warning
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Please install the terminal cover correctly
after wiring to ensure the insulation distance.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in death or serious injury.

12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8 16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20
(N A) 1 30
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60
5 10
3
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30
0 (min) 60

Connect to Load
SII SI
O O 3
O I
I O

3P/4P
N A B C N A B C

SII SI

12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8 16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20
(N A) 1 30 TA16D4S1604TPE Automatic
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60 ATSE Open transition
5 10 Insulation test is done
3 Ie:160A Ue:AC380V~440V in factory wrong
Auto Non t 2 20 Icw:10kA/0.1s dielectirc test will

Return Return (A N) 1 30
No:20312050020 damage the controller.

0 (min) 60

Warning
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Please install the terminal cover correctly
after wiring to ensure the insulation distance.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in death or serious injury.

12
10 14

f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4
6 3
5
6
7
8 16
9 18
Note: Customer can configure
230 240 f

Mode
t Off 0s 5s

G
220
380
400 415
250
440
4 2 (

2
3 5
) 10 20
10
20
phase sequence to A, B, C and N
t

Prio. N SI SII
Ue(V)
(N A) 1
0
3
30
(s) 60
5 10
through Active Automatic HMI
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30
0 (min) 60

108 DOCA0214EN–01
Wiring Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Wiring Diagrams for Frame 250: 100–250 A and Frame 630:


320–630 A
SII SI

2 Connect to SII

< S II

Connect to SI
<SI

N 1 3 5 1

Lock Manual Auto

OF/AUX

12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8 16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20
(N A) 1 30
Prio. N SI SII
Ue(V) 0 (s) 60
5 10
TA63D4S6304TPE Automatic
3
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30
0 (min) 60 Ie: 630A Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz
AC-33B Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

< Load

12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8 16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20
(N A) 1 30
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60
5 10
3
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30
0 (min) 60

Connect to Load
SII SI
O O 3
O I
I O

3P/4P
N A B C N A B C

SII SI

< S II

<SI

N 1 3 5

Lock Manual Auto

OF/AUX

12
10 6 14
5 7
f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4 8 16

230 240 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t 2 20
(N A) 1 30
Prio. N SI SII
Ue(V) 0 (s) 60
5 10
TA63D4S6304TPE Automatic
3
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30
0 (min) 60 Ie: 630A Ue: AC380V-440V 50/60Hz
AC-33B Icw: 20kA/0.5s,25kA/0.1s
No. 220403010005
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

< Load

12
10 14

f 50Hz 60Hz U 8 4
6 3
5
6
7
8 16
9 18
Note: Customer can configure
230 240 f

Mode
t Off 0s 5s

G
220
380
400 415
250
440
4 2 (

2
3 5
) 10 20
10
20
phase sequence to A, B, C and N
t

Prio. N SI SII
Ue(V)
(N A) 1
0
3
30
(s) 60
5 10
through Active Automatic HMI
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N) 1 30
0 (min) 60

DOCA0214EN–01 109
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Installation of Mechanism Accessories


What’s in This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................... 111
Power Connection Accessories .................................................................... 112
Insulation Accessories ................................................................................. 132
Auxiliary Contacts ....................................................................................... 146

110 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Overview
The mechanism accessories for the TransferPacT Active Automatic, TransferPacT
Automatic and TransferPacT Remote are as below:
• Power connection accessories
◦ Steel connector
◦ Aluminum connector
◦ Terminal extension
◦ Spreader
◦ Load extension bar
◦ Copper/aluminum lug
• Insulation accessories
◦ Terminal cover (default accessory for frame 100: 32–100 A and frame 160:
80–160 A)
◦ Interphase barrier
◦ Terminal shield
◦ Insulating screen (for frame 250: 100-250 A and frame 630: 320-630 A
only)
• Auxiliary contacts
• Spare parts
◦ Handles (for frame 250: 100-250 A and frame 630: 320-630 A only)

DOCA0214EN–01 111
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Power Connection Accessories

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARCH FLASH
Ensure to prepare cables with correct stripping length specified in this section.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
HAZARD OF FIRE
• Use only specified wiring cross-section with the equipment and comply with
the specified wiring requirements.
• Tighten the connections to the specified torque values.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

Steel Connector

CAUTION
HAZARD OF OVERHEATING
Do not use steel connectors LV429242 or LV429243 over 160 A.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Overview
Steel connectors can be used to connect the switch and power cables.
They can be mounted on the TransferPacT Active Automatic / Automatic / Remote
100-250 A transfer switch equipment.

The table below provides the list of steel connectors.

Switch Number of poles Steel connectors

Frame 250: 100–250 A 3P LV429242


4P LV429243

112 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Installing the Steel Connector

x12 5
x12
2 4
x12
x12 3

1
x12

6 x12

matic
Auto

SII
E
25 04TP SI
D4S
TA25 matic
40V
50/60
380-4 ,15kA/0.
Ue: AC kA/0.5s
1s
Hz
3P/4P 3P/4P Auto
0A 10
Ie: 25 B Icw: 7-6-1
0002 6094
AC-33 040301
IEC/EN
No. 224048.11 TPE
GB/T1 2504
D4S

7 TA25 Hz
x12 12 14
6 7 16 10
40V
50/60
380-4 ,15kA/0.
Ue: AC kA/0.5s
1s

10 0A Icw:
5 8
Ie: 25 B 7-6-1
0002
84
U 9 18
AC-33 040301 6094
6 3 20
IEC/EN
No. 224048.11
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
60Hz 230
240
415
3 20 GB/T1
2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1

4 mm
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G
t Off Ue(V)
“Test”
2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (A 0 (min
SI

5/32 in.Prio.
N
Auto
Return
Non
Return

“Test”

Steel connector Stripping length Cable section Torque

LV429242 25 mm (1 in.) 1.5–95 mm² (16–4/0 AWG) 12±1.2 N•m (106±10.62 lb-in.)

LV429243 25 mm (1 in.) 1.5–95 mm² (16–4/0 AWG) 12±1.2 N•m (106±10.62 lb-in.)

DOCA0214EN–01 113
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Aluminum Connector

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
It is mandatory to install terminal shield when the connectors are used.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Overview
Aluminum connectors can be used to connect the switch and power cables. It
supports to connect up to 6 cables simultaneously.
Aluminum connectors are screwed on the switch using the screws delivered with
the aluminum connectors.

The table below provides the list of aluminum connectors.

Switch Number of poles Aluminum Number of cables


connector
Frame 250: 100–250 A 3P LV429227 1
LV429259 1
TPSCON49 (1) 1

TPSCON51 2
TPSCON47 6
4P LV429228 1
LV429260 1
TPSCON50 1
TPSCON52 (1) 2

TPSCON48 6
Frame 630: 320–630 A 3P TPSCON53 1
4P TPSCON54 1
(1) Aluminum connectors for load terminals only.

114 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Installing Aluminum Connectors for 1 Cable


LV429227 / LV429228 / LV429259 / LV429260

x12
2

1 3
x12 x12

x12
x12 5 6
matic
Auto
x12
x12 4 04TP
E

TA2
5D

0A
4S25

10
440V
50/60
380- ,15kA/0.
Ue: AC kA/0.5s
1s
Hz
7 8 mm
Ie: 25 Icw: 6-1
947-
0002

5/16 in.
3B
AC-3 040301 C/EN 60
IE
No. 22 048.11
14
GB/T

“Test”

3P/4P 3P/4P

SII

SI
matic
Auto

E
4TP
S250
5D4
TA2 50/60
Hz
440V 1s
380- ,15kA/0.
12 14 Ue: AC kA/0.5s
6 7 16
0A 10
Icw:
10
84
5 8
Ie: 25 02 7-6-1
U 9 18
-3 3B 0100 60 94
AC 0403 1 IEC/EN
No. 22

Aluminum connector Stripping length Cable section Torque

LV429227 25 mm (1 in.) 25–50 mm2 (4–1/0 AWG) 20±2 N•m (180±18 lb-in.)

70–95 mm2 (2/0–4/0 AWG) 26±2.6 N•m (225±22.5 lb-in.)

LV429228 25 mm (1 in.) 25–50 mm2 (4–1/0 AWG) 20±2 N•m (180±18 lb-in.)

70–95 mm2 (2/0–4/0 AWG) 26±2.6 N•m (225±22.5 lb-in.)

LV429259 25 mm (1 in.) 120–185 mm2 (250–350 kcmil) 26±2.6 N•m (225±22.5 lb-in.)

LV429260 25 mm (1 in.) 120–185 mm2 (250–350 kcmil) 26±2.6 N•m (225±22.5 lb-in.)

DOCA0214EN–01 115
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

TPSCON49 / TPSCON50

4 x12

22
3 22 mm
7/8 in.
1 5 x12
x12 31±3.1 N•m
274±27.4 lb-in.
8 mm
x12 5/16 in.
2
6 mm
15/64 in.

15±1.5 N•m
130±13 lb-in.

3P/4P 3P/4P

SII

SI
ic
ic m at
m at Auto
Auto

PE
4TPE 504T
S250 D4S2
D4 TA25 50/60
Hz
TA25 50/60
Hz
40V
380-4 ,15kA/0.
1s
40V 1s
380-4 ,15kA/0. 12 14 Ue: AC kA/0.5s
Ue: AC kA/0.5s 10
5
6 7 16
8 0A
Ie: 25 B Icw:
10
0A Icw:
10 84
0002 7-6-1
Ie: 25 B 7-6-1 U 9 18
AC-33 040301 6094
0002 6094 6 3 20
IEC/EN
AC-33 040301 ) 10
No. 224048.11
IEC/EN f 4 2 (
No. 224048.11
5 10
240 /T1
60Hz GB
3 20
230
GB/T1
415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G
t Off Ue( V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (A 0 (min
SI
N Non
Prio.
Auto Return
Return

“Test”
“Test”

Aluminum connector Stripping length Cable section

TPSCON49 30 mm (1.2 in.) 120–240 mm2(250–450 kcmil)

TPSCON50 30 mm (1.2 in.) 120–240 mm2 (250–450 kcmil)

116 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

TPSCON53 / TPSCON54

x12
1
2
x12
< S II

3 x12
<SI
8 mm
5/16 in.

X
OF/AU

x12

4 31±3.1 N•m
Auto
matic 274±27.4 lb-in.
PE
304T
D4S6 z
TA63 40V
50/60H
s
380V-4 ,25kA/0.1
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 20k
Ie: 630B Icw: 6-1
005 60947- ad
AC-33 403010 /EN < Lo
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
GB/T1

< S II

<SI
37±3.7 N•m
5 x12 327±32.7 lb-in.

8 mm
OF/AU
X 5/16 in.

3P/4P 3P/4P
matic
Auto

30 4TPE
D4S6 z
TA63 40V
50/60H
s
380V-4 ,25kA/0.1
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 20k
Ie: 630B Icw: 6-1
005 60947- ad
AC-33 403010 /EN < Lo
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
GB/T1

Aluminum connector Stripping length Cable section

TPSCON53 30 mm (1.2 in.) 35–300 mm2 (2–600 kcmil)

TPSCON54 30 mm (1.2 in.) 35–300 mm2 (2–600 kcmil)

DOCA0214EN–01 117
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Installing Aluminum Connector for 2 cables


TPSCON51 / TPSCON52
NOTE: TPSCON51 / TPSCON52 aluminum connectors can be connected on
load terminals only.
matic
Auto

TPE
15±1.5 N•m
04
TA2
5D 4S25
440V
50/60
1s
Hz 130±13 lb-in.
380- ,15kA/0.
Ue: AC kA/0.5s
0A 10
Ie: 25 Icw: 6-1
3B 0002 947-
AC-3 040301 C/EN 60
. 22 1 IE
No 8.1
1404
GB/T

1 x4

2 x4 6 mm
15/64 in.
SII

SI
matic
Auto

E
4TP
S250
5D4
TA2 50/60
Hz
440V 1s
380- ,15kA/0.
12 14 Ue: AC kA/0.5s
6 7 16
0A 10
Icw:
10
5 8
Ie: 25 6-1
84 9 18 3B 0002 947-
AC-3 040301 C/EN 60
U
6 3 20
) 10 . 22 1 IE
f 4 2 ( No 8.1
5 10 1404
240
GB/T
x4
3
60Hz 230 415 2
20

400 250 30
50Hz 440
t 1 60
A
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380

6
3 20
t Of f
G
Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (A 0 (min

Prio.
N
SI

Auto
Retur
n
Non
Retur
n 22±2.2 N•m
191±19.1 lb-in.

4
x4
8 mm

22
5/16 in.
22 mm
7/8 in.

3 5 x4
x4

3P/4P 3P/4P
matic
Auto

E
4TP
S250
5D4
TA2 50/60
Hz
440V 1s
380- ,15kA/0.
Ue: AC kA/0.5s
0A 10
Ie: 25 Icw: 6-1
3B 0002 947-
AC-3 040301 C/EN 60
IE
No. 22 048.11
14
GB/T

Aluminum connector Stripping length of back cables Stripping length of front cables Cable section

TPSCON51 50.8 mm (1.2 in.) 25.4 mm (1 in.) 50–120 mm² (1/0 AWG–250
kcmil)

TPSCON52 50.8 mm (1.2 in.) 25.4 mm (1 in.) 50–120 mm² (1/0 AWG–250
kcmil)

NOTE: Install back cables first, and then front cables.

118 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Installing Aluminum Connector for 6 cables


TPSCON47 / TPSCON48

SII

SI
matic
Auto

ic 4TPE
Auto
mat
15±1.5 N•m TA25
D4S2
50
0V
50/60H
s
z

380-44 ,15kA/0.1
130±13 lb-in. 10
5
12 14
6 7 16
8
A
Ie: 250B
Ue: AC A/0.5s
Icw:
10k
6-1
4TPE 60947-
84 9 18 002
AC-33 403010
U

S250 6 3 20 /EN
) 10
No. 220 1 IEC
D4 f 4 2 (
4048.1
TA25
z 5 10
50/60H 60Hz 230
240
415
3 20 GB/T1
0V s 2
380-44 ,15kA/0.1 50Hz 400 250 30
t
Ue: AC A/0.5s
440 A 1 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
A 10k 5 10
Ie: 250B Icw: 6-1
0s
G
380 3 20
t Off Ue(V)
AC-33 403010
002 60947- 2 30
/EN t
No. 220 1 IEC Mode
N 1 ) 60
4048.1 SII (A 0 (min

GB/T1 N
SI
Non
Prio.
Auto Return
Return

1 x12

2 x12 3 4 6 mm
6 mm 15/64 in.
15/64 in.

3P/4P 3P/4P

SI SII

TA25D4S2504TPE Automatic

Ie: 250A Ue: AC380-440V 50/60Hz


AC-33B Icw: 10kA/0.5s,15kA/0.1s
No. 220403010002
GB/T14048.11 IEC/EN 60947-6-1

Aluminum connector Stripping length of back Stripping length of front Cable section Torque
cables cables
TPSCON47 30 mm (1.182 in.) 15 mm (0.59 in.) 1.5–6 mm² (16–10 AWG) 4±0.4 N•m (35±3.5 lb-in.)

TPSCON48 30 mm (1.182 in.) 15 mm (0.59 in.) 8–35 mm² (8–2 AWG) 6±0.6 N•m (53±5.3 lb-in.)

DOCA0214EN–01 119
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Linergy DP Distribution Block


To install the Linergy DP on theTransfer switching equipment, consult the
instruction sheet 04696008.

The table below provides the list of linergy DP distribution block.

Switch Number of poles Linergy DP distribution block

Frame 250: 100–250 A 3P LVS04033


4P LVS04034

120 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Terminal Extension

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• It is mandatory to install interphase barriers when terminal extensions are
used.
• For straight terminal extensions, it is mandatory to install insulating screen or
custom made fiber insulating plate.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Overview
The terminal extensions are used to extend the connection possibilities of the
switch.
The terminal extensions are screwed on the switch using the screws delivered
with the switch.
The screws delivered with the terminal extensions are used to screw bars or lugs
on the terminal extensions.

The table below provides the list of the straight terminal extension:

Switch Number of poles Straight terminal extensions

Frame 250: 100–250 A 3P LV429263


4P LV429264

The table below provides the list of the edgewise terminal extension:

Switch Number of poles Edgewise terminal extensions

Frame 250: 100–250 A 3P LV429308


4P LV429309
Frame 630: 320–630 A 3P TPSCON55
4P TPSCON56

DOCA0214EN–01 121
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Installing Terminal Extension for Frame 250: 100–250 A

1 x12

M8x20

x12
2 x12
3 15±1.5 N•m
130±13 lb-in.

6 mm
15/64 in.

SOI
SII

matic
Auto

50 4TPE
D4S2
TA25
z
50/60H
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
12 14 Ue: AC A/0.5s
6 7 16 A 10k
Icw:
10
5 8
Ie: 250B 6-1
AC-33 403010
002 60947-
/EN
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
240
415
GB/T1
250
440

Ue(V)

8±0.8 N•m
70.8±7.08 lb-in.

13 mm
1/2 in.

SOI

SI

4 8±0.8 N•m
x9
70.8±7.08 lb-in.

Auto
matic
13 mm
TA25
D4S2
50 4TPE

0V
50/60H
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
s
z 1/2 in.
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 10k
Ie: 250B Icw: 6-1
AC-33 403010
002 60947-
/EN
No. 220 1 IEC
/T1 4048.1
GB

SOI

SI

122 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Installing Edgewise Terminal Extension for Frame 630: 320–630 A

x12
x12
2 M12x30
3

1 x12
18 mm M10x25
11/16 in.
20±2 N•m
177.01±17.70 lb-in.

x12
4
< S II

x12 50±5 N•m


<SI

5 442±44.2 lb-in.

< S II

16 mm
<SI 5/8 in.
6
x12 OF/AU
X

SII
atic
Autom
SI

PE
304T
OF/AU
X D4S6
TA63
0Hz
50/6
V s
80V-4405kA/0.1
AC3 5s,2
20kA/0.
Icw:
AC-33B

DOCA0214EN–01 123
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Spreader

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• It is mandatory to install interphase barriers when spreaders are used.
• It is mandatory to install insulating screen or custom made fiber insulating
plate when spreaders are used.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Overview
The spreaders are used on switches:
• to increase the pole pitch and align the poles with circuit breaker poles or
• to increase the clearance distance between phases or
• to connect larger bars or lugs.
The spreaders are screwed on the switch using the screws delivered with the
switch.
The screws delivered with the spreaders are used to screw bars or lugs on the
spreaders.

The table below provides the list of the spreader:

Switch Number of poles Spreaders

Frame 250: 100–250 A 3P LV431563


4P TPSCON39(1)

4P LV431564(2)

Frame 630: 320–630 A 3P TPSCON40


4P TPSCON41(1)

4P TPSCON68(2)

(1) Spreaders for SI/SII power terminals only.

(2) Spreaders for load terminals only.

Installing Spreader for Frame 250: 100–250 A


NOTE: Pay attention to the direction mark on the interphase barrier before
installation.
NOTE: Install the longer part at the left side for spreaders of 4 poles.

124 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

1 x9

M8x20

2 x9

6 mm
15/64 in.
15±1.5 N•m
130±13 lb-in.

matic
Auto

50 4TPE
D4S2
TA25
z
50/60H
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 10k
Ie: 250B Icw: 6-1
AC-33 403010
002 60947-
/EN
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
GB/T1

4
x6
M8x25
13 mm
1/2 in.
SII

SI
matic
Auto

8±0.8 N•m 25D4


S250
4TPE
z
TA 50/60H

70.8±7.08 lb-in.
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
12 14 Ue: AC A/0.5s
6 7 16 A 10k
8
Ie: 250B Icw: 6-1
9 18
AC-33 403010
002 60947-
20 /EN
) 10
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
(
10
60Hz 20 GB/T1
50Hz
30
60
f 5s (s)
0s 10
G 20
t Off 30
) 60
Mode SII (min
SI
N Non
Prio.
Auto Return
Return

DOCA0214EN–01 125
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Installing Spreader for Frame 630: 320–630 A


NOTE: Pay attention to the direction mark on the interphase barrier before
installation.
NOTE: Install the longer part at the left side for spreaders of 4 poles.

18 mm
11/16 in.
M12x30

20±2 N•m
177.01±17.70 lb-in.

SII

SI

12 14
10 6 7 16
5 8
84 9 18
U
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G )
t Off Ue(V 2 30
t
e N 1 60
Mod SII (A 0 (min)
SI
N Non
Prio. rn
Auto Retu
rn
Retu

3 x8
< S II
x8

<SI
4 50±5 N•m < S II

442±44.2 lb-in.
x9
1 <SI

5
16 mm x6
5/8 in.
X
OF/AU

2 SII
x9 OF/AU
X

ati c
Autom
SI

PE
304T
D4S6
TA63
0Hz
50/6
V s
80V-4405kA/0.1
Ue: AC3 A/0.5s,2 SII
A 20k c
Ie: 630 Icw: -1
d ati
AC-33B403010
005 60947-6 < Loa Autom
IEC/EN
10
12 14
6 7 16
No. 220048.11 SI
84
5 8
GB/T14
U 9 18
6 3 20
) 10
4 2 (
4TPE
f
5 10

M10x25 S630
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415
50Hz
250
2
D4
TA63
400 30
t 0Hz
440 A 1 60 50/6
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s) V s
80V-4405kA/0.1
5 10
0s 380 3 20
Ue: AC3 A/0.5s,2
G )
t Off Ue(V 2 30
t A 20k
e N 1 60 Ie: 630 Icw: -1
d
60947-6
SII (A 0 (min)
Mod
AC-33B403 010005 < Loa
SI
IEC/EN
Prio.
N Non
rn
12 14
6 7 16
No. 220048.11
Retu 10
Auto
rn 84
5 8
GB/T14
Retu U 9 18
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G )
t Off Ue(V 2 30
t
e N 1 60
Mod SII (A 0 (min)
SI
N Non
Prio. rn
Auto Retu
rn
Retu

126 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Load Extension Bar


The load extension bars are used to connect the power terminals of switch and
cables for load side.

Overview
The load extension bars are used to connect the power terminals of switch and
cables for load side.
The table below provides the list of load extension bars:

Switch Number of poles Load extension bars

Frame 100: 32–100 A 4P TPSCON35


Frame 160: 80–160 A 4P TPSCON36

Installing Extension Bar for Frame 100: 32–100 A and Frame 160: 80–160 A

Transf
erPacT 2 3.5±0.3 N•m
SII
Auto 30.98±2.65 lb-in.
SI

240
60Hz 230 415
400 250
50Hz 440
f 5s 220 (N
0s 380
t Of f
G
Ue(V)

n)
Mode SII (A 0 (mi
SI
N Non
Prio. n
Auto Retur
n
Retur

1 PZ2
x4

erPacT
Transf

Auto
16 SII
18 SI
20

60Hz
50Hz
f 5s

t Of f
0s
G

3.5±0.3 N•m
30.98±2.65 lb-in.
4

x4 5 mm
3/24 in.
3

DOCA0214EN–01 127
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

erPacT
Transf

Auto
16

18
20
SI
SII
5
60Hz
50Hz
f 5s
0s
t Of f
G

128 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Compression Lug

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• It is mandatory to install interphase barrier.
• It is mandatory to use the screws provided in the switch packaging box.
• For Aluminum lugs with interphase barriers, it is mandatory to install front
insulating screen or custom made fiber insulating plate.
• For copper lugs 2 cable connection, it is mandatory to install rear insulating
screen or custom made fiber insulating plate.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
HAZARD OF FIRE
• Use only specified wiring cross-section with the equipment and comply with
the specified wiring requirements.
• Tighten the connections with the specified torque value.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

Overview
The compression lugs are screwed on the switch using the screws delivered with
the switch.

The table below provides the list of the compression lugs:

Switch Number of poles Material Compression lugs

Frame 250 : 100–250 3P Cu LV429252


A
LV429253
LV429254
Al LV429504
LV429506
4P Cu LV429256
LV429257
LV429258
Al LV429505
LV429507
Frame 630: 320–630 3P Cu TPSCON57
A
TPSCON59
Al TPSCON61
TPSCON63

DOCA0214EN–01 129
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

4P Cu TPSCON58

TPSCON60
Al TPSCON62

TPSCON64

Installing Compression Lug

1
2
3
M8x20
15±1.5 N•m
130±13 lb-in.

6 mm
15/64 in.
Cu
SII

SI
matic
Auto

PE
504T
D4S2
TA25
z
50/60H
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
12 14 Ue: AC A/0.5s
6 7 16 A 10k
Icw:
10
5 8
Ie: 250B 6-1
AC-33 403010
002 60947-
/EN
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
60Hz 230
240
415
GB/T1
50Hz 400 250
440
f 5s 220
0s 380
G
t Off Ue(V)

Mode SII
SI
N Non
Prio.
Auto Return
Return

SOI
SII

SI
SI
matic
Auto

50 4TPE
D4S2
TA25
z
50/60H
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 10k
Ie: 250B Icw: 6-1
AC-33 403010
002 60947-
/EN
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
60Hz 230
240
415
GB/T1
50Hz 400 250
440
f 5s 220
0s 380
G
t Off Ue(V)

Mode SII
SI
N Non
Prio.
Auto Return
Return

Compression lug Tool Screws Cable section Torque

LV429252 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 120 mm² (250 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

130 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

LV429253 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 150 mm² (300 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

LV429254 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 185 mm² (350 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

LV429504 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 150 mm² (300 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

LV429506 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 185 mm² (350 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

LV429256 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 120 mm² (250 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

LV429257 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 150 mm² (300 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

LV429258 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 185 mm² (350 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

LV429505 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 150 mm² (300 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

LV429507 Hexagon socket wrench M8 x 20 185 mm² (350 kcmil) 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

TPSCON57 Hexagon socket wrench M10 x 25 240 mm² 15±1.5 N·m (130±13 lb-
in.)

TPSCON59 Hexagon socket wrench M10 x 25 300 mm² 50±5 N·m (442±44.2 lb-
in.)

TPSCON61 Hexagon socket wrench M10 x 25 240 mm² 50±5 N·m (442±44.2 lb-
in.)

TPSCON63 Hexagon socket wrench M10 x 25 300 mm² 50±5 N·m (442±44.2 lb-
in.)

TPSCON58 Hexagon socket wrench M10 x 25 240 mm² 50±5 N·m (442±44.2 lb-
in.)

TPSCON60 Hexagon socket wrench M10 x 25 300 mm² 50±5 N·m (442±44.2 lb-
in.)

TPSCON62 Hexagon socket wrench M10 x 25 240 mm² 50±5 N·m (442±44.2 lb-
in.)

TPSCON64 Hexagon socket wrench M10 x 25 300 mm² 50±5 N·m (442±44.2 lb-
in.)

DOCA0214EN–01 131
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Insulation Accessories
Terminal Cover

DANGER
HAZARD OF FLASH OVER BETWEEN POLARITIES
Terminal cover must be installed after wiring to ensure proper insulation.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
UNGUARDED MACHINERY HAZARD
Install the terminal cover correctly after wiring, to ensure the insulation distance.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Overview
The terminal covers are used between the power terminals to provide the correct
insulation between the phases. They are only supported on TransferPacT Active
Automatic / Automatic 32-100 A and 80-160 A transfer switch equipment only.

Installing Terminal Cover for Frame 100: 32–100 A and Frame 160: 80–160 A
x3
1

erPacT
Transf

Auto
16 SII
18 SI
20

60Hz
50Hz
f 5s
0s
t Of f
G

Mode SII
SI
N Non
Prio. n
Auto Retur
n
Retur

132 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Interphase Barrier
The interphase barriers are installed between the power terminals of the TSE to
provide insulation between the phases.

The table below provides the list of the interphase barrier:

Switch Number of poles Interphase barrier

Frame 160: 80–160 A 3P TPSISO29


4P TPSISO29
Frame 250: 100–250 A 3P TPSISO65
4P TPSISO65
Frame 630: 320–630 A 3P TPSISO65
4P TPSISO65

Installing Interphase Barrier for Frame 160: 80–160 A


NOTE: Pay attention to the direction mark on the interphase barrier before
installation.
x3
2

1
x3
is done
tic n test
is done tic n test

Automa Automa
Insulatio wrong Insulatio wrong
will in factory will
in factory
c test r. c test r.
dielectir the controlle dielectir the controlle

PE transition 0V damage PE trans ition


0V
damage

S1604T OpenC380V~44 S1604TOpenC380V~44


TA16D4 ATSE 0A
Ue:A TA16D4 ATSE Ue:A
0A .1s
Ie:16 0kA/0.1s Ie:16 0kA/0

erPacT erPacT
Icw:1 20 Icw:1 20
0500 0500
Transf No:2
0312
Transf No:2
0312

uto uto
12 14 12 14
10 6 7 16 10 6 7 16
5 8 SII 5 8 SII
84 9 18 84 9 18
U U
6 3 20 SI 6 3 20 SI
) 10 ) 10
f 2 ( f 2 (

x6 4

S1604T
PE transition 0V
OpenC380V~44
Automa
tic

damage
n test
Insulatio wrong
in factory
c test
is done

will
dielectir the controlle
r.
x2 S1604T
PE transition 0V
OpenC380V~44
Automa
tic
in factory

damage
n test
Insulatio wrong
c test
is done

will
dielectir the controlle
r.

5
TA16D4 ATSE Ue:A
0A .1s TA16D4 ATSE Ue:A
0A .1s
Ie:16 0kA/0 Ie:16 0kA/0
erPacT erPacT
Icw:1 20 Icw:1 20
0500 0500
Transf No:2
0312
Transf No:2
0312

uto uto
SII SII
SI SI

DOCA0214EN–01 133
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Installing Interphase Barrier for Frame 250: 100–250 A and Frame 630: 320–
630 A
NOTE: Pay attention to the direction mark on the interphase barrier before
installation.

< S II
x9

<SI

x9

X
OF/AU

matic
Auto

PE
S6 304T
TA 63D4 50/60Hz
40V s
380V-4 ,25kA/0.1
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 20k
Ie: 630B Icw: 6-1
005 60947- ad
AC-33 403010 /EN < Lo
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
GB/T1

134 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Terminal Shield
The terminal shield can be installed on the top and/or bottom of the power
terminals of TSE to provide IP20 protection.
NOTE: The terminal cover and the terminal shield cannot be used together.
Only one of them is applicable to an ATSE.

The table below provides the list of the terminal shield:

Switch Number of poles Terminal shield

Frame 100: 32–100 A 4P TPSISO30


Frame 160: 80–160 A 4P TPSISO31
Frame 250: 100–250 A 4P LV429518
Frame 630: 320–630 A 4P TPSISO42

Installing Terminal Shield for Frame 100: 32–100 A


NOTE: Remove the terminal covers on source I (SI) and load if present.
Place the terminal shield on the power terminals and then the snap should be
inserted into the holes correctly.

Snap

x2

erPacT
Transf

Auto
16 SII
18 SI
20
PG
34NT
60Hz D4L6 WOTPC
TA10
20

50Hz
f 5s
0s erPacT N
Transf
20
t Of f
G

Mode SII
SI
N Non
Prio.
Retur
n Auto
Auto 6 7
5 12 14 8 SII
n
Retur 4 8
10 16
9
U 18 SI
3 6 10
) 20
f 2 4 (
5 10
240 3
60Hz 230 415 2
20

400 250 30
50Hz 440
t 1 60
R
f 5s 220 (N 0 (S)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
t Of f
G
Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (R 0 (min
SI
N Non
Prio. Retur
n
Auto
n
Retur

DOCA0214EN–01 135
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Installing Terminal Shield for Frame 160: 80-160 A


NOTE: Remove the terminal covers and interphase barriers, if present.

3 x3

1 x3

x3 Automa
tic n test
Insulatio wrong
is done

will
in factory
c test er.
dielectir the controll
PE transition 0V damage

S1604T Open V~44


ATSE Ue:AC380
TA16D4 0A
Ie:16 0kA/0.1s
erPacT
Icw:1 20
0500
Transf No:2
0312

uto
12 14
10 6 7 16
SII
SI

136 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Installing Terminal Shield for Frame 250: 100-250 A

1
x12

2 180°
x12 x12
3

5 x12
4 x12
Crack!

Click!

SII

SI
matic
Auto

PE
504T
D4S2
TA25
z
50/60H
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
12 14 Ue: AC A/0.5s
6 7 16 A 10k
Icw:
10
5 8
Ie: 250B 6-1
60947-
84 9 18 002
AC-33 403010
U
6 3 20 /EN
) 10
No. 220 1 IEC
240
f 4 2 (
5 10
/T1 4048.1
60Hz GB
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G
t Off Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (A 0 (min
SI
N Non
Prio.
Auto Return
Return

8 PZ2
0.8±0.08 N•m
7.08±0.70 lb-in.

9
0.8±0.08 N•m
7.08±0.70 lb-in.

matic
Auto

DOCA0214EN–01 137
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

10 Click!

SII

matic
Auto

PE
504T
D4S2
TA25
z
50/60H
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
12 14 Ue: AC A/0.5s
6 7 16 A 10k
Icw:
10
5 8
Ie: 250B 6-1
60947-
84 9 18 002
AC-33 403010
U
6 3 20 /EN
) 10
No. 220 1 IEC
f 4 2 (
5 10 4048.1
3 20 GB/T1
2
250 30
t 1
440 A 60
(N 0 (s)
5 10
3 20
2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
(A 0 (min

10

11

12 PZ2

13 0.8±0.08 N•m 12
7.08±0.70 lb-in.

0.8±0.08 N•m 13
7.08±0.70 lb-in.
matic
Auto

PE
S2 504T
TA 25D4 50/60H
z
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
14 Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 10k
Icw:
16
8
Ie: 250B 6-1
9 18
AC-33 403010
002 60947-
10 20 /EN
No. 220 1 IEC
10 4048.1
20 GB/T1
30
60
10
20
30
60

11
13
PZ2

12

138 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Installing Terminal Shield for Frame 630: 320-630 A

3P x3 3P x3
4P x4 4P x4

3P 4P

3P 4P

DOCA0214EN–01 139
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

< S II

<SI

2
PZ2

0.8±0.08 N•m
7.08±0.70 lb-in.
X
OF/AU

matic
Auto

PE
304T
D4S6 z
TA63 40V
50/60H
s
380V-4 ,25kA/0.1
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 20k
Ie: 630B Icw: 6-1
005 60947- ad
AC-33 403010 /EN < Lo
No. 220 1 IEC
/T1 4048.1
GB

3
< S II
PZ2
<SI

0.8±0.08 N•m
7.08±0.70 lb-in.

X
OF/AU

Auto
matic
PZ2
PE
S6 304T
TA 63D4 50/60Hz
40V s
380V-4 ,25kA/0.1
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 20k
Ie: 630B Icw: 6-1
005 60947- ad
AC-33 403010 /EN < Lo
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
GB/T1

0.8±0.08 N•m
3 7.08±0.70 lb-in.

140 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Insulating Screen

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• It is mandatory to install insulating screen or custom made fiber insulating
plate when clearance distance of wiring is less than the minimum clearance
distance.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Overview
The insulating screens are installed at the front or rear of the power terminals of
the TSE to provide insulation between the phases.

The table below provides the list of the insulating screen:

Switch Insulating screen

Frame 250: 100–250 A TPSISO66


Frame 630: 320–630 A TPSISO67

DOCA0214EN–01 141
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Installing Rear Insulating Screen for Frame 250: 100–250 A

Click!

SII

SI
matic
Auto

50 4TPE
D4S2
TA25
z
50/60H
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
12 14 Ue: AC A/0.5s
6 7 16 A 10k
Icw:
10
5 8
Ie: 250B 6-1
60947-
84 9 18 002
AC-33 403010
U
6 3 20 /EN
) 10
No. 220 1 IEC
f 4 2 (
5 10 4048.1
60Hz 230
240
415
3 20 GB/T1
2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G
t Off Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (A 0 (min
SI
N Non
Prio.
Auto Return
Return

2
SII

SI
matic
Auto

PE
504T
D4S2
TA25
z
50/60H
0V s
380-44 ,15kA/0.1
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 10k
Ie: 250B Icw: 6-1
AC-33 403010
002 60947-
/EN
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
GB/T1

142 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Installing Front Insulating Screen for Frame 630: 320–630 A

< S II

1 <SI

2 x2

1
X
OF/AU

PZ1
0.5±0.05 N•m
matic
Auto
4.42±0.44 lb-in.
PE
304T
D4S6 z
TA63 40V
50/60H
s
380V-4 ,25kA/0.1
Ue: AC A/0.5s
A 20k
Ie: 630B Icw: 6-1
005 60947- ad
AC-33 403010 /EN < Lo
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
GB/T1

DOCA0214EN–01 143
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Installing Rear Insulating Screen for Frame 630: 320–630 A

1
< S II

<SI

x9

1 OF/AU
X

x4 2 SI
SII
Auto
matic

PZ1 TA63
D4S6
30 4TPE
z

0.5±0.05 N•m A
Ie: 630B
Ue: AC A/0.5s
Icw:
20k
40V

6-1
50/60H
380V-4 ,25kA/0.1
s

4.42±0.44 lb-in.
005 60947- ad
AC-33 403010 /EN < Lo
No. 220 1 IEC
4048.1
12 14
10 6 7 16

84
5 8
GB/T1
U 9 18
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
50Hz 400 250 30
t 1
440 A 60
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
G
t Off Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (A 0 (min
SI
N Non
Prio.
Auto Return
Return

< S II

<SI

OF/AUX

3 SI
SII

3D4S6
304TPE
0Hz
Autom
atic

TA6 50/6
s
440V
80V- ,25kA/0.1
Ue: AC3 /0.5s
20kA
Ie: 630A Icw: 7-6-1 d
3B 0005
AC-3 0301 IEC/EN 6094 < Loa
No. 2204 8.11
1404
GB/T

144 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

PowerTag
The PowerTag can be mounted on the 4–pole TransferPacT Automatic 100-250 A
transfer switch equipment.
To install the PowerTag M250 on the Transfer switching equipment, consult the
instruction sheet QGH46820

Switch Number of poles PowerTag

Frame 250: 100–250 A 4P LV434021

DOCA0214EN–01 145
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Auxiliary Contacts
Overview
There are two categories of auxiliary contacts for TransferPacT Active Automatic /
Automatic 32-100 A and 80-160 A, and two categories for TransferPacT Active
Automatic / Automatic / Remote 100–250 A and 320– 630 A transfer switch
equipment.

The table provides the list of the auxiliary contact:

Switch Type of auxiliary contact Auxiliary contact

Frame 100: 32–100 A Source Position TPSAUX32


OFF Position TPSAUX33
Frame 160: 80– 160 A Source Position TPSAUX32

OFF Position TPSAUX33


Frame 250 100–250 A Source Position TPSAUX43
OFF Position TPSAUX44
Frame 630: 320– 630 A Source Position TPSAUX43
OFF Position TPSAUX44

146 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Installing Auxiliary Contacts for Frame 100: 32–100 A and Frame


160: 80–160 A
NOTE: Maximum two auxiliary contacts can be mounted on the same switch.

1
cT
ferPa
Trans

6 7
Auto
5 12 14 8 SII
10 16
4 8 9
U 18 SI
3 6 10
) 20
f 2 4 (
5 10
240
60Hz
3 20
230 415 2
400 250 30
t
220
440 R 1 60
(N 0 (S)
380 5 10
G 3 20
Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
(R 0 (min

Non
Return

f 50Hz 60Hz U
3 4
8
5 6
10 12 14
7

16
8
TransferPacT
3 6 18 9
230 240 f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 2 4 ( ) 20 10 SI SII
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t
2 20 Auto
(N R 1 30
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (S) 60
cT
ferPa 3
5 10
Trans Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (R N 1 30
0 (min) 60

Auto
SII
SI

DOCA0214EN–01 147
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Installation of Mechanism Accessories

Installing Auxiliary Contacts for Frame 250: 100–250 A and Frame


630: 320–630 A

2
< S II
x2
<SI

1 < S II

OF/AUX <SI

3 x2
PE
Autom
atic
PZ2
304T
D4S6
TA63
0Hz
50/6
V
80V-440 A/0.1s
,25k
Ue: AC3 /0.5s
20kA
Ie: 630A Icw: 7-6-1 d

1.4±0.1 N•m
0005
AC-33B 0301 EN 6094 < Loa
No. 2204 11 IEC/
048.
GB/T14

12.39±0.88 lb-in.

x6
Click
4 OF/AU
X

SII

SI

< S II

ad
<SI
< Lo
12 14
10 6 7 16
5 8
84 9 18
U
6 3 20
) 10
f 4 2 (
5 10
240 3
60Hz 230 415 2
20

400 250 30
50Hz 440
t 1 60
A
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
0s 380 3 20
t Of f
G
Ue(V) 2 30
t
N 1 ) 60
Mode SII (A 0 (min
SI
N Non
Prio. n
Auto Retur

x2
n
Retur

OF/AUX
5

d
< Loa

148 DOCA0214EN–01
Installation of Mechanism Accessories Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

SII
SII
SI
SI

12 14
10 6 7 16
5 8
12 14 84 9 18
6 7 16
U
10
5 8 6 3 20
) 10
84 9 18 f 4 2 (
U 5 10
240
60Hz
6 3 20 3 20
) 10 230 415
f 4 2 ( 2
50Hz
5 10 400 250 30
240 t
60Hz
3 20 440 A 1 60
230 415 2
f 5s 220 (N 0 (s)
5 10
50Hz 400 250 30 0s 380
t 3 20
440 1 G )
f 5s 220 (N
A
0 (s)
60
t Off Ue(V 2 30
5 10 t
0s 380
G ) 3 20
e N 1 60
t Off Ue(V 2 30
Mod SII (A 0 (min)
t SI
e N 1 60 N Non
Mod SII (A 0 (min) Prio.
SI Auto Return
Prio.
N Non Return
Auto Return
Return

SI SII

= TPSAUX43 TPSAUX44

DOCA0214EN–01 149
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

HMI
What’s in This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................... 151
Automatic HMI with Rotary Switch as Embedded HMI .................................... 152
Active Automatic HMI with LCD Display as Embedded HMI ............................ 154
External HMI ............................................................................................... 192

150 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Overview
TransferPacT ATSE has two embedded HMI and one external HMI. The two
embedded HMIs can be inserted on the slots of the embedded HMI. They are as
below:
• Automatic HMI with Rotary Switch
• Active Automatic HMI with LCD Display
The two embedded HMIs can be replaced with each other with hot swap
approach.

DOCA0214EN–01 151
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Automatic HMI with Rotary Switch as Embedded HMI


The Automatic HMI with rotary switch is convenient for commissioning as all
settings are transparent to the customer. Only some spare parts can be used with
automatic HMI using TPCCIF02 accessories.

12
10 6 714
5
f 50Hz 60Hz1 6 U 8
4 8 16

230 240
7 6 3 9 18
f
t Off 0s 5s 2 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode 3
G 380 440
8t A
2 20
(N 1 30
Ue(V) 0
(s) 60
Prio. N SI SII 4 3
5 10
Auto Non 2 20
Return 5
Return 9t
(A N 1 30
0 (min) 60

Automatic HMI Settings


Label Description Function Diagram

1 Dip switch for rated The rated frequency as nominal value will become the
frequency reference for frequency threshold.
50Hz 60Hz
2 Dip switch for time delay at • Time delay applied to the center-off position O
off position when position I and position II are transferring, it
stops at position O to protect inductive load. 0s 5s
• The delay is used for both process of transfer to N
and A.
• The delay shall detect both sources, the stop
condition will be either N recovered, or A source
failed.
3 Dip switch for application The application type can be selected as Utility to Utility
or Utility to Genset. G

4 Preferable source SI and SII indicate the physical position of source. The
selection or priority normal and alternate power can be match to SI or SII
source, page 203 according to requirement: SI SII
• When select SI as priority: SI becomes normal
power while SII becomes alternate power.
• When select SII as priority: SII becomes normal
power while SI becomes alternate power.

5 Dip switch for working Two auto working mode can be selected:
mode • Auto-Auto return Auto Non
• Auto-Non return Return Return

6 Rotary switch for rated The rated voltage as nominal value will become the
voltage Ue reference for voltage threshold. 230 240
2P (L-N) : 220 V, 230 V, 240 V, 250 V. 400 415
3P and 4P (L-L): 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V.
220 250
380 440

Ue(V)
7 Rotary switch for threshold Δf: The frequency deviation gap as reference of rated
selection of voltage and frequency. 12
frequency 10 6 714
ΔU: The voltage deviation gap as reference of rated 5
U 8 8 16
voltage. 4
6 3 9 18
f
4 2 ( ) 10 20

152 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Label Description Function Diagram

8 Rotary switch for transfer Δt: Transfer time delay between N–A. The unit is 4 2 ( ) 10 20
time delay from N–A second. 5
3 10
2 20
t
(N A 1 30
0 (s) 60
5
9 Rotary switch for Δt: Transfer time delay between A–N. The unit is 0 (s) 60
re-transfer time delay from minute. 5 10
3
A–N
t 2 20
(A N 1 30
0 (min) 60

DOCA0214EN–01 153
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Active Automatic HMI with LCD Display as Embedded HMI


The Active Automatic HMI with LCD display of the switch matches to all extension
accessories using TPCDIO15. It displays all logs and settings with password
protection. It can also be extended with more advanced functions, such as
communications with extension plus 24 Vdc.

Active Automatic HMI Settings

1 2

Label Description Function

1 LCD screen LCD screen for display

2 ESC ESC button to cancel the selected option or return to the previous menu.

3 Up button Up navigation button for rolling up

4 Down button Down navigation button for rolling down

5 OK button OK button to confirm the selected option

154 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Wizard Setup
NOTE: Before configuring wizard setup, TransferPacT ATSE should be
without transfer function.
A Wizard should be configured once the ATSE is power ON for the first time.
Perform the following procedure to complete the wizard setup:
1. Select the language.
There are eight languages and options are:
• English
• French
• Spanish
• German
• Italian
• Portuguese
• Russian
• Chinese

Setup Wizard


Português(BR)
English

ESC 00:51 OK

2. Select the Rated Voltage.


The rated voltages options are:
• 2P: 220 V, 230 V, 240 V, 250 V
• 3P and 4P: 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V
NOTE: The power supply of TransferPacT is required to be 380 Vac -20%
to 440 Vac +20% at a frequency of 50/60 Hz and it has been developed to
meet most of the network configurations.

Setup Wizard
Rated Voltage
400V

ESC 00:06 OK

3. Select the Rated Frequency.


The rated frequencies options are:
• 50 Hz
• 60 Hz

Setup Wizard
Rated Frequency
50H!

ESC 00:07 OK

DOCA0214EN–01 155
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

4. Select the Neutral Position.


The neutral positions options are:
• A-B-C-N
• N-A-B-C

Setup Wizard
Neutral Position
N-A-B-C

ESC 00:07 OK

5. Select the Source Configuration.


The different source type and priority is shown below:
• SI-Utility(N)/SII-Utility(A)
• SI-Utility(N)/SII-Genset(A)
• SI-Genset(A)/SII-Utility(N)
• SI-Utility(A)/SII-Utility(N)

Setup Wizard
Source Config
SII Utility(A) SI Utility(

ESC 00:08 OK

6. Select the Return Modes.


The return modes options are:
• Auto-Return
• Non-Return

Setup Wizard
Return Modes
Auto Return

ESC 00:08 OK

7. Click OK to save the changes.

Setup Wizard
ReturnTips
Modes
Auto Return
Finish?
OK
ESC 00:08 OK

156 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Home Page of LCD Display

Quick View 1

iew 2 3
Set &..

4
Meas.. 5
Status
02:47
6 7 8

Label Description Function

1 Quickview Name for current page

2 Quickview Open Quickview menu to check general information of ATSE

3 Set & operate Open Set & operate menu for commissioning and settings

4 Measure Open Measure menu to check the details of power status

5 Status Open Status menu to check status of ATSE include event logs

6 Icon for time To show the time


7 Time Time which needs to be reset after power contingency

8 Transfer Mode Eight control modes:


• Auto mode (AT)

• Test mode

• Comm mode

• Voluntary transfer mode

• Local control mode

• Transfer Inhibit mode

• Force to off mode

• Fire protection mode

• Handle transfer mode

DOCA0214EN–01 157
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Quickview Page

Quick View

iew Set &..

Meas.. Status
02:47

1. Select Quickview and press OK button to open its sub-pages.


2. Press Up and Down buttons to navigate to each sub-page.
The below table provide the details of the Quickview sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

System Overview To show the system overview:


• SI and SII general status.
• Contact position. System Overview
SI(N - U) SII(A - U)
OK OK
Load on SI(N)
Auto

SI To show the SI voltage status:


• Real time phase voltage of SI.
SI
• Real time frequency of SI.
U12 387.3 V
U23 386.9 V
U31 385.1 V
F 50.0 H
00:13

SII To show the SII power status:


• Real time phase voltage of SII.
SII
• Real time frequency of SII.
U12 0.0 V
U23 0.0 V
U31 0.0 V
F 0.0 H
00:13

Slots To show the slot status:


• Black box indicates that the accessories
are working. Slots
• Empty box indicates that the accessories
are not working.

1 2 3 4 5
00:13

Date/Time This sub page is to show the timer in controller.


NOTE: Calibrate the timer after long
terms of power interruption. Use DC 24 V Date / Time
to keep the accuracy of the timer.
2000 - 01 - 01
YY MM DD
00 : 14 : 12
HH MM SS
00:14

158 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Measurement Page

Measure

iew Set &..

Meas.. Status
02:47

1. Select Measurement and press OK button to open its sub-pages.


2. Press Up and Down buttons to navigate to each sub-page.
The below table provide the details of the Measurement sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Measure To show the rolling list of source:


• Use up and down button for navigation.
Measure
• Click different source and voltage to
check their voltage information. SI Voltage
SII Voltage
SI Others
SII Others
00:16

SI or SII Voltage To show the SI or SII voltage status:


• Real time phase voltage of SI or SII.
SI Voltage
• Real time frequency of SI or SII.
U12 387.6 V
U23 387.3 V
U31 385.2 V

00:16

SI Others To show the rolling list of source:


• Use up and down button for navigation.
Measure
• Click different source and others to check
their power information. SI Voltage
SII Voltage
SI Others
SII Others
00:16

SI or SII Others To show the SI or SII other status:


• Real time frequency of SI or SII.
SI Others
• Real time unbalance rate of SI or SII.
F 50.0 H
UNB 0.4 %

00:17

DOCA0214EN–01 159
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Status Page

Status

iew Set &..

Meas.. Status
00:02

1. Select Status and press OK button to open its sub-pages.


2. Press Up and Down buttons to navigate to each sub-page.
The below table provide the details of the Status sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Slots Slots Status sub-page navigates to more


status checking in the display and click Slots
to check status of accessories slots.
Status
Slots
Transfer Count
Transfer Diag
Event Logs
00:03

To show the Slot status:


• Black box indicates that the accessories
has inserted well. Slots
• Empty box indicates that the accessories
has not inserted or not inserted well.

1 2 3 4 5
00:13

Transfer Diagnostic Transfer Diagnostic Status sub-page


navigates to more status checking in the
display and click Transfer diagnostic to check Status
the transfer times.
Slots
Transfer Count
Transfer Diag
Event Logs
00:03

Transfer Diagnostic sub-page is to show the


transfer times:
• Successful transfer counts Transfer Diag
• Failed transfer counts Too Many Transf.
• Too many transfer counts Count:
0

00:04

Event Logs Event Logs Status sub-page navigates to


more status checking in the display and click
Event Logs to check list of logs. Status
Transfer Diag
Event Logs
Version

00:24

160 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Event Logs sub-page is to show the list of


event logs:
• Use up and down button for navigation. Event Logs
• Click Event Log XX to check status of Transf. from A to N
logs. SI Back To Normal
SI No Voltage
Transf. from N to A
01:33

Event Logs Event Logs sub-page is to show the


information of event logs:
• Time of events. Event Logs
• Source status during events. Run Mode: Auto
Event Type: Raised
For more information on Event Code, refer to
Event Logs., page 279 SI Back To Normal
Press OK for more
01:33

Detailed Info To show the cause of events:


• Transfer mode during events.
• Type of events. Detailed Info
2000 - 01 - 01 01:31
SI 392 392 390 50.0
SII 392 392 390 50.0

01:33

Version Version Status sub-page navigates to more


status checking in the display and click
Version to check product information. Status
Transfer Diag
Event Logs
Version

00:24

To show the list of hardware components:


• Use up and down button for navigation.
Version
• Click different components to check their
information. Controller
Internal LCD
Modbus
Fire Dry Level
03:17

Controller To show the components information


• Series number of components.
Controller
• Firmware version.
Serial Number:
DT-21-24-2-07-0001
Version:
000.016.000
03:18

DOCA0214EN–01 161
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Set & Operate Page

Set & Operate

iew Set &..

Meas.. Status
02:47

1. Select Set & Operateand press OK button to open its sub-pages.


2. Press Up and Down buttons to navigate to each sub-page.

Operations Sub-Page
NOTE: Once the TransferPacT ATSE is power ON for the first time, suggested
to change the password. The default password is 0000.
The below table provide the details of the Operation sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Operations Set & Operate page navigates to more


maintenance checking in the display and click
Operations to control the ATSE or acknowledge
Set & Operate
the alarm.
Operations
System Param
Application
Time Delays
03:32

Warning Acknowledge Operations sub-page navigates to more operating


checking in the display and click Warning to cancel
the alarm.
Operations
Warning Ack
Alarm Ack
Local Control
Comm Control
On Load Test Failure

Warning Ack
SI No Voltage
SII No Voltage
On Load Test Failure

On Load Test Failure

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Warning Acknowledge.
Warning Ack
SI No Ack
Voltage
All
SII No Voltage
Confirm?
On Load Test Failure
OK
Failure On Load

162 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Alarm Acknowledge Operations sub-page navigates to more operating


checking in the display and click Alarm
Acknowledge to cancel the alarm.
Operations
Warning Ack
Alarm Ack
Local Control
Comm Control
01:45

Alarm Ack
SI Phase Rotation

01:45

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Alarm Acknowledge.
Alarm Ack
SI Phase
AckRotation
All
Confirm?
OK
01:46

Local Control Operations sub-page navigates to more operating


option in the display and click Local Control to
enter local control mode.
Operations
Warning Ack
Alarm Ack
Local Control
Comm Control
03:21

• When open the first page, the local control is


disabled.
• Click Enable Local Control to energize local Local Control
control mode. Enable Local Control
• Local Control cannot be enabled under
handle mode, force mode, and fire protection
mode.
23:47

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Local Control.
Local Control
EnableTips
Local Control
Enable?
OK
00:02

DOCA0214EN–01 163
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Disable Local Control Disable Local Control is a sub-page of Local


Control.

Select the Disable Local Control again to exit Local Control


local control mode. Disable Local Control
NOTE: If exit this page without disable local Transfer to SI(N)
control mode, the transfer switch will stay at Transfer to SII(A)
local control mode until a control mode with Transfer to OFF
higher priority is coming 03:25

at the bottom indicates the transfer mode.


Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the
Local Control.
Local Control keys
Disable Local Control
Tips
Transfer to SI(N)
Disable?
Transfer to SII(A)
Transfer toOK
OFF
00:06

Transfer to SI(N) Transfer to SI(N) and Transfer to SII(A) depends


on target source status, Transfer to OFF always
Transfer to SII(A) active.
Local Control
Transfer to OFF After enabling the Local Control, there are three Disable Local Control
options: Transfer to SI(N)
• Click Transfer to SI (N) to transfer the switch Transfer to SII(A)
to normal. Transfer to OFF
• Click Transfer to SII (A) to transfer the switch 11:47
to alternative.
• Click Transfer to OFF to transfer the switch
to OFF.
NOTE: Transfer to N or A will be successful
only when the target source is present and in
range.

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Local Control.
Local Control
DisableTips
Local Control
Transfer to SI(N)
Confirm?
Transfer to SII(A)
Transfer toOK
OFF
11:47

Comm Control Operations sub-page navigates to more operating


option in the display and click Comm Control to
enter communication control mode.
Operations
Alarm Ack
Local Control
Comm Control
On Load Test
01:17

Transfer by Com Transfer by Com is a sub-page of Comm Control.

Comm control navigates to more com operation in


the display. Comm Control
Transfer by Comm
Select transfer by com to set the operation: Test by Comm
• ON: enable transfer by com function.
• OFF: disable transfer by com function.
NOTE: The function is disabled by default. 01:17

164 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Comm Control
Transfer by Comm
ON

01:17

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Transfer by com and click OK to save changes.
Comm Control
Transfer by Comm
Tips
OFF
Save Changes?
OK
00:02

Test by Com Test by Com is a sub-page of Comm Control.

Comm control navigates to more com operation in


the display. Comm Control
Transfer by Comm
Select Tesy by com to set the operation: Test by Comm
• ON: enable test by com function.
• OFF: disable test by com function.
NOTE: The function is disabled by default. 01:17

Comm Control
Test by Comm
OFF

01:17

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Test by com and click OK to save changes.
Comm Control
Test byTips
Comm
ON
Save Changes?
OK
00:02

On Load Test Operations sub-page navigates to more operating


option in the display and click On Load Test to
enter test mode.
Operations
Local Control
On Load Test

23:31

DOCA0214EN–01 165
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the On


Load Test.
Operations
CriticalLimited
Local Control
30 s
On Load Test
Off Load OK
00:04

Test in Progress
The icon indicates that the test is started. Test
can be interrupted during the process. Test in Progress
NOTE: Select Esc and click ok to stop the Genset Start Delay
test, ATSE will go back to Auto mode.
0000 s
ESC
00:08

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the On


Load Test.
Test in Progress
Geneset
Tips Start Delay
0000
Stop s
Test?
OK
ESC
00:08

Off Load Test Operations sub-page navigates to more operating


option in the display and click Off Load Test to
enter test mode.
Operations
Comm Control
On Load Test
Off Load Test

00:08

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the Off


Load Test.

Confirm to select Limited test or Unlimited test Operations


CriticalLimited
On Load Test
30 s
Off Load
OK
00:06

limited test

Operations
CriticalUnlimited
On Load Test
0s
Off Load
OK
00:08

unlimited test

166 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Test in Progress The icon indicates that the test is started. Test can
be interrupted during the process.
NOTE: Test in Progress

Select Esc and click ok to stop the Off Load Test Delay
26 s
test, ATSE will go back to Auto mode.
ESC
00:08

limited test

Test in Progress
Waiting...

ESC
00:09

unlimited test
Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the Off
Load Test.
Test OK
Test OK

ESC
00:09

unlimited test

DOCA0214EN–01 167
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

System Parameters Sub-Page


The below table provide the details of the System Parameters sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

System Parameters Set & Operate page navigates to more


maintenance options in the display and click
System Parameters to set nominal values.
Set & Operate
Operations
System Param
Application
Time Delays
03:32

Rated Voltage Rated Voltage is a sub-page of System


Parameters.

System Parameters page navigates to more System Param


parameter options in the display and click Rated Rated Voltage
Voltage to set nominal values of voltage. Rated Frequency
Neutral Position

01:51

Navigate to select different rate voltage:


• 2 P : 220 V, 230 V, 240 V, 250 V
• 3 P and 4 P: 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V System Param
Rated Voltage
380V

23:58

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Rated Voltage and click ok to save changes.
System Param
RatedTips
Voltage
380V
Save Changes?
OK
00:01

Rated Frequency Rated Frequency is a sub-page of System


Parameters.

System Parameters page navigates to more System Param


parameter options in the display and click Rated Rated Voltage
Frequency to set nominal values of frequency. Rated Frequency
Neutral Position

01:58

Navigate to select different rated frequency:


• 50 Hz
• 60 Hz System Param
Rated Frequency
50H!

01:58

168 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Rated Frequency and click ok to save changes.
System Param
RatedTips
Frequency
50H!
Save Changes?
OK
01:58

Neutral Position Neutral Position is a sub-page of System


Parameters.

System Parameters page navigates to more System Param


parameter options in the display and click Neutral Rated Voltage
Position to set nominal values of Neutral Position. Rated Frequency
Neutral Position

01:58

Navigate to select different neutral position:


• A-B-C-N
• N-A-B-C System Param
Neutral Position
N-A-B-C

01:58

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Neutral Position and click ok to save changes.
System Param
Neutral Position
Tips
A-B-C-N
Save Changes?
OK
01:59

DOCA0214EN–01 169
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Application Sub-Page
The below table provide the details of the Application sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Application Set & Operate page navigates to more


maintenance options in the display and click
Application to set the type of source, threshold,
Set & Operate
time delays and transfer conditions.
Operations
System Param
Application
Time Delays
03:32

Source Config Source Config is a sub-page of Application.

Application page navigates to more application


options in the display and click Source Config to Application
set the type of source. Source Config
Transfer Conditions
Return Modes
SI(N) Setpoints
03:33

Select different source type and priorities and click


source configuration to set type of source
• SI Utility (N)-SII Utility (A) Application
• SI-Utility (N) / SII-Genset (A) Source Config
• SI-Genset (A) / SII-Utility (N) SI Utility(A)-SII Utility(N)
• SII Utility (N)-SI Utility (A)

03:35

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Source Config and click ok to save changes.
Application
SourceTipsConfig
SI Utility(A)-SII Utility(N)
Save Changes?
OK
03:36

Transfer Condition Transfer Condition is a sub-page of Application.

Application page navigates to more application


options in the display and click Transfer Condition Application
to set the conditions. Source Config
Transfer Conditions
Return Modes
SI(N) Setpoints
03:33

Phase Sequence Warning Phase Sequence Warning is a sub-page of


Transfer Condition.

Transfer Condition page navigates to more Transfer Conditions


condition options in the display. Phase SEQ Warning
Volt UNB Warning
N Wrong Warning
U>Ue Transfer
03:38

170 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Select Phase Sequence Warning to set the


warning conditions:
• On: enable phase sequence detection. Transfer Conditions
• Off: disable phase sequence detection. Phase SEQ Warning
NOTE: ON
• IEC default : On
• GB default : Off
00:10

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Phase Sequence Warning and click ok to save
changes.
Transfer Conditions
PhaseTips
SEQ Warning
OFF
Save Changes?
OK
00:10

Voltage Unbalance Voltage Unbalance Warning is a sub-page of


Warning Transfer Condition.

Transfer Condition page navigates to more Transfer Conditions


condition options in the display. Phase SEQ Warning
Volt UNB Warning
N Wrong Warning
U>Ue Transfer
02:05

Select Voltage Unbalance Warning to set the


warning conditions:
• On: enable voltage unbalance detection. Transfer Conditions
• Off: disable voltage unbalance detection. Volt UNB Warning
NOTE: Default setting is shown as disabled. OFF

02:05

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Voltage Unbalance Warning and click ok to save
changes.
Transfer Conditions
Volt UNB
TipsWarning
OFF
Save Changes?
OK
02:06

Neutral Wrong Warning Neutral Wrong Warning is a sub-page of


Transfer Condition.

Transfer Condition page navigates to more Transfer Conditions


condition options in the display. Phase SEQ Warning
Volt UNB Warning
N Wrong Warning
U>Ue Transfer
02:06

DOCA0214EN–01 171
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Select Neutral Wrong Warning to set the warning


conditions:
• On: enable neutral wrong detection. Transfer Conditions
• Off: disable neutral wrong detection. N Wrong Warning
NOTE: ON
• IEC default : On
• GB default : Off
02:06

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Neutral Wrong Warning and click ok to save
changes.
Transfer Conditions
N Wrong
TipsWarning
OFF
Save Changes?
OK
02:06

Over Voltage Transfer Over Voltage Transfer is a sub-page of Transfer


Condition.

Transfer Condition page navigates to more Transfer Conditions


condition options in the display. Volt UNB Warning
N Wrong Warning
U>Ue Transfer
Abnormal FRQ Trans
02:08

Select Over Voltage Transfer to set the


conditions:
• On: enable over voltage detection. Transfer Conditions
• Off: disable over voltage detection. U>Ue Transfer
NOTE: Default setting is shown as disabled. OFF

02:08

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Over Voltage Transfer and click ok to save
changes.
Transfer Conditions
U>Ue Tips
Transfer
Save Changes?ON
OK
02:08

Abnormal Frequency Abnormal Frequency is a sub-page of Transfer


Condition.

Transfer Condition page navigates to more Transfer Conditions


condition options in the display. N Wrong Warning
U>Ue Transfer
Abnormal FRQ Trans
Gen Start Fail Warning
02:08

172 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Select Abnormal Frequency to set the conditions:


• On: enable abnormal frequency detection.
• Off: disable abnormal frequency detection. Transfer Conditions

NOTE: Default setting is shown as disabled. Abnormal FRQ Trans


OFF

02:08

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Abnormal Frequency and click ok to save
changes.
Transfer Conditions
Abnormal
TipsFRQ Trans
Save Changes?ON
OK
02:08

Gen Start Fail Warning Gen Start Fail Warning is a sub-page of Transfer
Conditions.

Transfer Condition page navigates to more Transfer Conditions


condition options in the display. U>Ue Transfer
Abnormal FRQ Trans
Gen Start Fail Warning
Neutral Loss Transfer
02:09

Select Gen Start Fail Warning to set the


conditions:
• On: enable gen start fail warning detection. Transfer Conditions
• Off: disable gen start fail warning detection. Gen Start Fail Warning
NOTE: Default setting is shown as disabled. OFF

02:09

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Gen Start Fail Warning and click ok to save
changes.
Transfer Conditions
Gen Start
TipsFail Warning
Save Changes?ON
OK
02:09

Neutral Loss Transfer Neutral Loss Transfer is a sub-page of Transfer


Conditions.

Transfer Condition page navigates to more Transfer Conditions


condition options in the display. Abnormal FRQ Trans
Gen Start Fail Warning
Neutral Loss Transfer

02:09

DOCA0214EN–01 173
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Select Neutral Loss Transfer to set the


conditions:
• On: enable neutral loss transfer detection. Transfer Conditions
• Off: disable neutral loss transfer detection. Neutral Loss Transfer
NOTE: Default setting is shown as disabled. OFF

02:09

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Neutral Loss Transfer and click ok to save
changes.
Transfer Conditions
Neutral Loss Transfer
Tips
Save Changes?ON
OK
02:09

Return Modes Return Modes is a sub-page of Application.

Application page navigates to more application


options in the display. Application
Source Config
Transfer Conditions
Return Modes
SI(N) Setpoints
03:33

Select Return Modes to set the transfer modes.


• Auto-Return
• Non-Return Application
Return Modes
Auto Return

00:52

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Return Modes and click ok to save changes.
Application
ReturnTips
Modes
Auto Return
Save Changes?
OK
00:52

SI(N) Setpoints SI(N) Setpoints is a sub-page of Application.

Application page navigates to more application


options in the display and select SI(N) Setpoints to Application
set the threshold. Source Config
Transfer Conditions
Return Modes
SI(N) Setpoints
03:33

174 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Under Voltage Dropout Under Voltage Dropout is a sub-page of SI(N)


Setpoints.

N to A Setpoints page navigates to more set point SI(N) Setpoints


options in the display for Under Voltage Dropout. Undervoltage Dropout
• The % and real value will be displayed Undervoltage Pickup
together. Overvoltage Dropout
• % can be set while the real value changed Overvoltage Pickup
dynamically. 02:46
• The range of under voltage dropout can be
70% - 95% of rated voltage with step of 1%.
• Default value is 85%
• 3P/4P: 85% Un (L-L) Under Voltage
• 2P: 85% Un (L-N) Dropout Threshold
85 % Un (L-L)
340.0 V

00:16

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Under Voltage Dropout and click ok to save
changes.
Under Voltage
Dropout Threshold
Tips
Save85 % Un (L-L)
Changes?
340.0 V
OK
00:17

Under Voltage Pickup Under Voltage Pickup is a sub-page of SI(N)


Setpoints.

N to A Setpoints page navigates to more set point SI(N) Setpoints


options in the display for Under Voltage Pickup. Undervoltage Dropout
• The % and real value will be displayed Undervoltage Pickup
together. Overvoltage Dropout
• % can be set while the real value changed Overvoltage Pickup
dynamically. 02:46
• The range of under voltage pickup can be
85% - 100% of rated voltage with step of 1%.
• Default value is 90%.
Under Voltage
Pickup Threshold
90 % Un (L-L)
360.0 V

02:44

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Under Voltage Pickup and click ok to save
changes.
Under Voltage
PickupTips
Threshold
Save90 % Un (L-L)
Changes?
360.0 V
OK
02:44

DOCA0214EN–01 175
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Over Voltage Dropout Over Voltage Dropout is a sub-page of SI(N)


Setpoints.

N to A Setpoints page navigates to more set point SI(N) Setpoints


options in the display for Over Voltage Dropout. Undervoltage Dropout
• The % and real value will be displayed Undervoltage Pickup
together. Overvoltage Dropout
• % can be set while the real value changed Overvoltage Pickup
dynamically. 02:46
• The range of over voltage dropout can be
105% - 135% of rated voltage with step of
1%.
• Default value is 110%. Overvoltage
Dropout Threshold
110 % Un (L-L)
440.0 V

02:44

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Over Voltage Dropout and click ok to save
changes.
Overvoltage
Dropout Threshold
Tips
110
Save % Un (L-L)
Changes?
440.0 V
OK
02:44

Over Voltage Pickup Over Voltage Pickup is a sub-page of SI(N)


Setpoints.

N to A Setpoints page navigates to more set point SI(N) Setpoints


options in the display for Over Voltage Pickup. Undervoltage Dropout
• The % and real value will be displayed Undervoltage Pickup
together. Overvoltage Dropout
Overvoltage Pickup
• % can be set while the real value changed
dynamically. 02:46
• The range of over voltage pickup can be
100% - 115% of rated voltage with step of
1%.
• Default value is 105%. Overvoltage
Pickup Threshold
105 % Un (L-L)
420.0 V

02:45

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Over Voltage Pickup and click ok to save
changes.
Overvoltage
PickupTips
Threshold
105 % Un (L-L)
Save Changes?
420.0 V
OK
02:45

176 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Under Frequency Dropout Under Frequency Dropout is a sub-page of SI(N)


Setpoints.

N to A Setpoints page navigates to more set point SI(N) Setpoints


options in the display for Under Frequency Overvoltage Pickup
Dropout. Underfreq Dropout
• The % and real value will be displayed Underfreq Pickup
together. Overfreq Dropout
• % can be set while the real value changed 02:46
dynamically.
• The range of under frequency dropout can be
80%-98% of rated frequency with step of
0.5%.
Underfrequency
• Default value is 96%.
Dropout Threshold
96.0 % fn
48.0 H!

02:45

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Under Frequency Dropout and click ok to save
changes.
Underfrequency
Dropout Threshold
Tips
96.0 % fn
Save Changes?
48.0 H!
OK
02:45

Under Frequency Pickup Under Frequency Pickup is a sub-page of SI(N)


Setpoints.

N to A Setpoints page navigates to more set point SI(N) Setpoints


options in the display for Under Frequency Overvoltage Pickup
Pickup. Underfreq Dropout
• The % and real value will be displayed Underfreq Pickup
together. Overfreq Dropout
• % can be set while the real value changed 02:46
dynamically.
• The range of under frequency pickup can be
85%-100% of rated frequency with step of
0.5%.
Underfrequency
• Default value is 97%.
Pickup Threshold
97.0 % fn
48.5 H!

02:45

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Under Frequency Pickup and click ok to save
changes.
Underfrequency
PickupTips
Threshold
97.0 % fn
Save Changes?
48.5 H!
OK
02:45

DOCA0214EN–01 177
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Over Frequency Dropout Over Frequency Dropout is a sub-page of SI(N)


Setpoints.

N to A Setpoints page navigates to more set point SI(N) Setpoints


options in the display for Over Frequency Overvoltage Pickup
Dropout. Underfreq Dropout
• The % and real value will be displayed Underfreq Pickup
together. Overfreq Dropout
• % can be set while the real value changed 02:46
dynamically.
• The range of over frequency dropout can be
101% - 120% of rated voltage with step of
0.5%.
Overfrequency
• Default value is 102%.
Dropout Threshold
102.0 % fn
51.0 H!

02:45

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Over Frequency Dropout and click ok to save
changes.
Overfrequency
Dropout Threshold
Tips
102.0 % fn
Save Changes?
51.0 H!
OK
02:45

Over Frequency Pickup Over Frequency Pickup is a sub-page of SI(N)


Setpoints.

N to A Setpoints page navigates to more set point SI(N) Setpoints


options in the display for Over Frequency Pickup. Overfreq Dropout
• The % and real value will be displayed Overfreq Pickup
together. Unbalance Rate
• % can be set while the real value changed
dynamically. 02:46
• The range of over frequency pickup can be
100% - 115% of rated voltage with step of
0.5%.
• Default value is 101%. Overfrequency
Pickup Threshold
101.0 % fn
50.5 H!

02:45

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Over Frequency Pickup and click ok to save
changes.
Overfrequency
PickupTips
Threshold
101.0 % fn
Save Changes?
50.5 H!
OK
02:45

178 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Unbalance Rate Unbalance Rate is a sub-page of SI(N) Setpoints.

N to A Setpoints page navigates to more set point


options in the display for Unbalance Rate. SI(N) Setpoints

• The % and real value will be displayed Overfreq Dropout


together. Overfreq Pickup
Unbalance Rate
• % can be set while the real value changed
dynamically.
02:46
• The range of unbalanced rate from 2% to
30%.
• Default value is Disabled.

Unbalance Rate
Unbalance Rate
5.0 %

02:45

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the

Unbalance Rateand click ok to save


Unbalance Rate
changes. Unbalance
Tips Rate
5.0 %
Save Changes?
OK
02:45

DOCA0214EN–01 179
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Time Delays Sub-Page


The below table provide the details of the Time Delays sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Time Delays Set & Operate page navigates to more


maintenance option in the display and click Time
Delays to set transfer times delay for different
Set & Operate
application.
Operations
System Param
Application
Time Delays
03:32

Transfer Delay Transfer Delay is a sub-page of Time Delays.

Time Delays page navigates to more delay options


in the display and click Transfer Delay to set Time Delays
transfer delay and click ok. Transfer Delay
Re-Transfer Delay
Center-off Delay
Loadshed Delay
02:51

• Select transfer delay and use up or down


button to set it. The range of transfer time is
from 0-1800 s with step of 1 s. Time Delays
• Default value is 0 s. Transfer Delay
3s

02:51

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Transfer Delay and click ok to save changes.
Time Delays
Transfer Delay
Tips
Save Changes? 3 s
OK
00:23

Re-Transfer Delay Re-Transfer Delay is a sub-page of Time Delays.

Time Delays page navigates to more delay options


in the display and click Re-Transfer Delay to set Time Delays
re-transfer delay and click ok. Transfer Delay
Re-Transfer Delay
Center-off Delay
Loadshed Delay
02:51

• Select Re-Transfer Delay and use up or


down button to set it. The range of re-transfer
time is from 0-60 min with step of 1 s. Time Delays
• Default value is 0 s. Re-Transfer Delay
0s

02:52

180 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Re-Transfer Delay and click ok to save changes.
Time Delays
Re-Transfer
Tips Delay
Save Changes? 0 s
OK
02:52

Center-off Delay Center-off Delay is a sub-page of Time Delays.

Time Delays page navigates to more delay options


in the display and click Center-off Delay to set Time Delays
center-off delay and click ok. Transfer Delay
Re-Transfer Delay
Center-off Delay
Loadshed Delay
02:51

• Select Center-off Delay and use up or down


button to set it. The range of centre off delay
is from 0-30 s with step of 1 s. Time Delays
• Default value is 0 s. Center-off Delay
0s

02:52

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Center-off Delay and click ok to save changes.
Time Delays
Center-off
Tips Delay
Save Changes? 0 s
OK
02:52

Loadshed Delay Loadshed Delay is a sub-page of Time Delays.

Time Delays page navigates to more delay options


in the display and click Load Shedding Delay to Time Delays
set load shedding delay and click ok. Transfer Delay
Re-Transfer Delay
Center-off Delay
Loadshed Delay
02:51

• Select load shedding and use up or down


button to set it.
• The range of load shedding delay is from 0-15 Time Delays
with step of 1 s. Loadshed Delay
• Default value is 0 s. 0s

02:52

DOCA0214EN–01 181
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Load Shedding Delay and click ok to save
changes.
Time Delays
Loadshed
Tips Delay
Save Changes? 0 s
OK
02:52

Genset Start Delay Genset Start Delay is a sub-page of Time Delays.

Time Delays page navigates to more delay options


in the display and click Genset Start Delay to set Time Delays
Genset delay and click ok. Gen Start Delay
Gen Cool Delay
Gen Fail Delay

02:51

• Select Genset Start Delay and use up or


down button to set it. The range of Genset
start time is from 0-120 s with step of 1 s. Time Delays
• Default value is 0 s. Gen Start Delay
3s

02:52

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Genset Start Delay and click ok to save changes.
Time Delays
Gen Start
TipsDelay
Save Changes? 3 s
OK
02:52

Genset Cooling Down Genset Cooling Down Delay is a sub-page of


Delay Time Delays.

Time Delays page navigates to more delay options Time Delays


in the display and click Genset Cooling Down Gen Start Delay
Delay to set Genset cooling down delay and click Gen Cool Delay
ok. Gen Fail Delay

02:51

• Select transfer delay and use up or down


button to set it The range of genset cooling
down delay is from 0 to 3600 s with step of 1 Time Delays
s.
Gen Cool Delay
• Default value is 0 s.
60 s

02:52

182 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Genset Cooling Down Delay and click ok to save
changes.
Time Delays
Gen Cool
TipsDelay
60 s
Save Changes?
OK
02:52

Genset Failure Delay Genset Failure Delay is a sub-page of Time


Delays.

Time Delays page navigates to more delay options Time Delays


in the display and click Genset Failure Delay to set Gen Start Delay
Genset ready alarm delay and click ok. Gen Cool Delay
Gen Fail Delay

02:51

• Genset failure delay is from 0 ~300 s. Default


value is 300 s.
• Select transfer delay and use up or down Time Delays
button to set it. Gen Fail Delay
• The range of Genset ready alarm is from 0-15 300 s
with step of 1 s.
• Default value is 0 s.
02:52
NOTE: This function of Genset ready alarm
can be disabled.

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Genset Failure Delay and click ok to save
changes.
Time Delays
Gen Fail
TipsDelay
300 s
Save Changes?
OK
02:52

DOCA0214EN–01 183
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Settings Sub-Page
The below table provide the details of the Settings sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Settings Set & Operate page navigates to more set &


operate option in the display and click Settings for
accessories commissioning, reset and password
Set & Operate
settings.
Settings
Language
Date / Time

03:32

Accessories Accessories is a sub-page of Settings.

Settings page navigates to more setting option in


the display and click Accessories for Settings
commissioning. Accessories
Quick View Auto Scroll
Change Password
System Logs
02:56

Modbus Modbus is a sub-page of Accessories.

Accessories page navigates to more accessory


option in the display and click Modbus for Accessories
commissioning. Modbus
NOTE: If the module of Modbus is not DI Test
inserted, the option will be empty.

00:08

Select the parameters as below:


• Set the Address
• Set the Baudrate Modbus

NOTE: The odd/even parity is automatically Address: 001


recognized. Baudrate: 19200
Parity: Even
Stop Bit: 1.5
01:39

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Modbus and click ok to save changes.
Modbus
Address:
Tips 001
Baudrate: 19200
Save Changes?
Parity: Even
Stop Bit: OK 1
01:39

DI Test DI Test is a sub-page of Accessories.

Accessories page navigates to more accessory


option in the display and click DI Test for Accessories
commissioning. Modbus
NOTE: If the module of remote test is not DI Test
inserted, the option will be empty.

00:08

184 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Set on load or off load test

DI Test
DI Test
On Load Test

00:12

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the DI


Test and click ok to save changes.
DI Test
DI Test
Tips
On Load Test
Save Changes?
OK
00:12

Quick View Auto Scroll is a sub-page of Settings.


Quick View Auto Scroll
Settings page navigates to more settings option in
the display and click Quick View Auto Scroll for Settings
commissioning. Accessories
NOTE: If the module of Quick View Auto Quick View Auto Scroll
Scroll test is not inserted, the option will be Change Password
empty. System Logs
02:56

Select Quick View Auto Scroll to set the


conditions:
• On: enable Quick View Auto Scroll detection. Quick View Auto ....
• Off: disable Quick View Auto Scroll detection. Quick View Auto Scroll
NOTE: Default setting is shown as disabled. OFF

02:39

Select Quick View Auto Scroll and use up or


down button to set it. The range of quick view auto
scroll time is from 0 ~300 s with step of 1 s.
Quick View Auto ....
Default value is 5 s. Quick View Auto Scroll
ON
Scroll Time
5s
02:39

Change Password Change Password is a sub-page of Accessories.

Accessories page navigates to more accessory


option in the display and click Change Password Settings
to change password. Accessories
Quick View Auto Scroll
Change Password
System Logs
02:56

DOCA0214EN–01 185
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Select the parameters to change password:


• Input 4 digital code to create new password.
NOTE: To change or reset the password: Change Password

1. Change to handle mode. 0***


****
2. Power OFF and ON the ATSE.
****
3. Press OK and ESC button for 10 seconds. Input Old Password
NOTE: The step 3 should be performed within 00:27
1 minute after step 2.

System Logs System Logs is a sub-page of Accessories.

Accessories page navigates to more accessory


option in the display and click System Logs. Settings
Change Password
System Logs
Reset Threshold & tim.

02:56

Select System Logs and use up or down button to


set it.
System Logs
2020 - 09 - 02 00 : 43
User Login OK

N: 044
00:56

186 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Reset to Default Reset to Default is a sub-page of Settings.

Accessories page navigates to more setting option


in the display and click Reset to Default to reset Settings
the controller. Change Password
System Logs
List of values which can be set: Reset Threshold & tim.
• Under Voltage
• Over Voltage 02:56
• Under Frequency
• Over Frequency
• Unbalance Rate
• Transfer Delay (T2)
• Center-Off Delay (T4)
• Re-Transfer Delay (T6)
• Genset Start Delay (T7)
• Loadshed Delay (T8)
• Genset Cool Delay (T9)
• Genset Fail Delay (T10)
• On Load Test Delay (T13)
• Off Load Test Delay (T14)

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the DI


Test and click ok to save changes.
Settings
Change Password
Tips
System Logs
Confirm?
Reset Threshold & tim.
OK
00:59

Settings
Change Password
Tips
System Logs
Reset Success...
Reset Threshold & tim.
OK
00:59

DOCA0214EN–01 187
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Language Sub-Page
The below table provide the details of the Language sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Language Set & Operate page navigates to more set &


operate option in the display and click Language to
select the preferred language.
Set & Operate
Settings
Language
Date / Time

03:32

Select the display language

Language



Português(BR)
English

03:45

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Language and click ok to save changes.
Language
Tips



Português(BR)
Save Changes?
English
OK
03:45

188 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Date and Time Sub-Page


The below table provide the details of the Date and Time sub-pages:

Sub-page name Sub-page function Display

Date and Time Set & operate page navigates to more set &
operate option in the display and click Date and
Time to set the time.
Set & Operate
Settings
Language
Date / Time

03:32

Select the parameters below:


• Select timer by year/month/day.
• Select timer by hour/minutes/seconds. Date / Time
2020 - 09 - 02
YY MM DD
01 : 01 : 31
HH MM SS
01:01

Confirm Operation Confirm Operations sub-page is to confirm the


Date and Time and click ok to save changes.
Date / Time
2020
Tips- 09 - 02
YY MM DD
Save Changes?
01 : 01 : 31
HH OK MM SS
01:02

Quick Menu Tour


The location of some frequently used menus are listed in the following table. You
can also find the default setting of these item.

Menu Sub-menu 1 Sub-menu 2 Range Default

System Param Rated Voltage - please refer to Ue-220V: 230V,


System or
Parameters Sub-
Page, page 168 Ue-400V: 400V,
or

Ue-208V: 230V

Rated Frequency - 50 Hz; 60 Hz 50 Hz

Neutral position - NABC; ABCN NABC

Application Source Config - S1 Utility(N) - SII S1 Utility(N) - SII


Genset(A); Genset (A)
S1 Utility(A) - SII
Utility(N);
S1 Utility(N) - SII
Utility(A);
S1 Genset(A) -
SII Utility(N)

Transfer Phase SEQ ON; OFF ON (IEC)


Conditions Warning OFF (China)

DOCA0214EN–01 189
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

Menu Sub-menu 1 Sub-menu 2 Range Default

Volt UNB ON; OFF OFF


Warning

N Wrong ON; OFF ON (IEC)


Warning OFF (China)

U > Ue Transfer ON; OFF OFF

Abnormal FRQ ON; OFF OFF


Trans
Gen Start Fail ON; OFF OFF
Warning

Neutral Loss ON; OFF OFF


Transfer
Return Modes - Auto Return; Auto Return
Non Return;
Manual Return
(China)

SI setpoints UV dropout please refer to 85 %


Application Sub-
UV pickup Page, page 170 90 %

OV dropout 110 %

OV pickup 105 %

UF dropout 96 %

UF pickup 97 %

OF dropout 102 %

OF pickup 101 %

Unbalance rate 2 %-30 % 5%

SII setpoints UV dropout please refer to 85 %


Application Sub-
UV pickup Page, page 170 90 %

OV dropout 110 %

OV pickup 105 %

UF dropout 96 %

UF pickup 97 %

OF dropout 102 %

OF pickup 101 %

Unbalance rate 2 %-30 % 5%


Time Delays Transfer Delay - 0-1800 s 3 s (IEC)
0 s (China)

Re-Transfer - 0-3600 s 60 s (IEC)


Delay 0 s (China)

Center-off Delay - 0-30 s 0s

Loadshed Delay - 0-15 s 0s

Gen Start Delay - 0-120 s 3 s (IEC)


0 s (China)

Gen Cool Delay - 0-3600 s 60 s (IEC)


0 s (China)

Gen Fail Delay - 15-300 s 300 s

Settings Accessories DI Test (if ON Load Test; ON Load Test


supported) Off Load Test

Modbus (if Address Address = 001


supported) Baudrate Baudrate =
Parity 19200
Stop bit Parity = Even
Stop bit = 2

190 DOCA0214EN–01
HMI Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Menu Sub-menu 1 Sub-menu 2 Range Default

Quick View Auto - ON (1-300 s); OFF


Scroll OFF
Language - - 8 languages English

Date/Time - - YYYY-MM-DD- 2000-01-01


HH-MM-SS 00:00:00

DOCA0214EN–01 191
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A HMI

External HMI
The External HMI is used to display the settings parameters remotely. It displays
the same parameters as shown on ATSE and has higher priority. There are two
parts of External HMI:
1. External HMI base, which is mounted on the panel doors.
2. LCD screen with embedded HMI.

SI SII

NOTE: The function module TPCDIO15 and HMI cable with RJ45 port is
needed to connect the external HMI.

192 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Operations on ATSE
What’s in This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................... 194
Automatic HMI with Rotary Switch as Embedded HMI .................................... 195
Active Automatic HMI with LCD Display as Embedded HMI ............................ 203
Control Mode .............................................................................................. 214

DOCA0214EN–01 193
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Overview
ATSE is an equipment containing one or more switching devices for disconnecting
load circuits from one supply and connecting to another supply. It is a self-acting
transfer switching equipment, including all necessary sensing inputs, monitoring,
and control logic for transferring operations.
The two types of transition are:
1. Open transition
2. Delayed transition

Open Transition
Open transition is a process to break before the transfer operation. It is done
intentionally to break the load current from one source prior to making it to the
other source, such that the load is not supplied for a period of time.

Delayed Transition
When the delay transition is activated, the switch will stay in an open circuit (main
contact will stay in off position for a period of time. It is applicable for 2 poles, 3
poles, and 4 poles). This delay allows the residual voltage of the load to decay
within the allowable range.

Condition of Delayed Transition


The delayed transition is recommended when motors are located on the load side.
Indeed, in the case of voltage loss on motors, the following may happen:
• When the inductive load loses power, it will generate self excitation voltage
due to inertia.
• The self excitation voltage needs a certain time constant to attenuate.
• When the self-excited voltage is 180° different from the voltage of another
power supply and superimposed, it will cause about twice the voltage impact.
• When the resistance of the motor is fixed, the current will also be increased to
2 times. In addition, the starting current of the motor is large (6-8 times rated
current), so the current shock of 12-16 times may occur.
The setting time of the delay shall ensure that the time length of the motor
disconnected from the power supply is equal to or greater than 1.5 open circuit AC
time constants of the motor; generally 0.5-1 s.

194 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Automatic HMI with Rotary Switch as Embedded HMI

12
10
5 6 714
8 8 16
f 50Hz 60Hz U 4
6 3 9 18
230 240 f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 t
2 20
(N A 1 30
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60
5 10
3
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N 1 30
0 (min) 60

Preferable Source Selection


TransferPacT Automatic HMI provide an easy way to select the preferred source
as normal source.
When the Genset is at normal power and the Utility is not so stable, make the
selection as below:
For TransferPacT Automatic: To select the preferred source, use dip switch to
make the selection.

12
10
5 6 714
8 8 16
f 50Hz 60Hz U 4
6 3 9 18
230 240 f
t Off 0s 5s 400 415 4 2 ( ) 10 20
Dip switch for preferred 220 250 3 5
10
Mode G 380 440 2 20
source selection (N
t
A 1 30
Ue(V) 0
Prio. N SI SII (s) 60
5 10
3
Auto Non t 2 20
Return Return (A N 1 30
0 (min) 60

DOCA0214EN–01 195
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Transfer Condition
The following are the auto-transfer conditions:
• Voltage deviation: Controller monitors two sources, and uses over-voltages
and under-voltages thresholds as conditions of source transfer.
• Frequency deviation: Controller monitors two sources, and uses over-
frequency and under-frequency thresholds as conditions of source transfer.

Threshold
Description Settings Default setting Adjustment range Note
% of nominal
Voltage Delta Dropout (under 10% 4 -> 20% Step of 2%
and over voltage)

Delta Pickup 20% of delta drop out fixed fixed

Frequency Delta Dropout 5% 2 -> 10% Step of 1%

Delta Pickup 20% of delta drop out fixed fixed

The accuracy of voltage sensing is 1%.


The accuracy of frequency sensing is 0.1%.

Voltage Dropout and Pickup


Voltage value

Over-voltage dropout value

Over-voltage pickup value

Nominal Voltage

Under-voltage pickup value

Under-voltage dropout value

No transfer Conditions No transfer Conditions No transfer


requested for transfer requested for transfer requested

• Over voltage dropout value: Above this value, the voltage is out of range and
transfer is initiated.
• Over voltage pickup value: When voltage goes back from over frequency, it is
a condition to go back to normal situation.
• Under voltage dropout value: Below this value, the frequency is out of range
and transfer is initiated.
• Under voltage pickup value: When voltage goes back from under voltage, it is
a condition to go back to normal situation.

196 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Frequency Dropout and Pickup


Frequency value

Over-frequency dropout value

Over-frequency pickup value

Nominal Frequency

Under-frequency pickup value

Under-frequency dropout value

No transfer Conditions No transfer Conditions No transfer


requested for transfer requested for transfer requested

• Over frequency dropout value: Above this value, the frequency is out of range
and transfer is initiated.
• Over frequency pickup value: When frequency goes back from over
frequency, it is a condition to go back to normal situation.
• Under frequency dropout value: Below this value, the frequency is out of
range and transfer is initiated.
• Under frequency pickup value: When frequency goes back from under
frequency, it is a condition to go back to normal situation.

Voltage and Frequency Setting


For TransferPacT Automatic: The rated voltage needs to be set using the dip
switch.
230 240
400 415
220 250
380 440

Ue(V)

DOCA0214EN–01 197
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Undervoltage Thresholds

Field Description

Default value • Dropout: 10%


• Pickup: 20% of delta dropout

Range Delta voltage ranges from 4%–20% of rated voltage: It could be 4–6–8–10–12–14–16–18–20%.

12
10
5 6 714
U 8 8 16
4
6 3 9 18
f
4 2 ( ) 10 20

Differential The differential between dropout and pickup on automatic HMI is fixed. The differential is set at
20% of the delta value.
Sequence of events • When a sensor detects a voltage below the dropout set voltage for a period longer than the
time delay, it will deem the voltage for out of range.
• When a sensor detects a voltage at or above the pickup point, it will deem the voltage as
acceptable.

Example of calculation on For example, Ue= 400 V , Dropout 10%= 40 V,


undervoltage of TransferPacT
Automatic Differential between dropout and pickup= 40 V * 20%= 8 V

Undervoltage dropout is 400 V - 40 V= 360 V

Pickup= 360 V + 8 V= 368 V

Overvoltage Thresholds

Field Description

Default value • Dropout: 10%


• Pickup: 20% of delta dropout

Range Delta voltage ranges from 4%–20% of rated voltage: It could be 4–6–8–10–12–14–16–18–20%.

12
10
5 6 714
U 8 8 16
4
6 3 9 18
f
4 2 ( ) 10 20
Default value: 10%

Differential The differential between dropout and pickup on automatic HMI is fixed. The differential is set at
20% of the delta value.
Sequence of events • When a sensor detects a voltage below the dropout set voltage for a period longer than the
time delay, it will deem the voltage for out of range.
• When a sensor detects a voltage at or above the pickup point, it will deem the voltage as
applicable.

Example of calculation on For example, Ue= 400 V , Dropout 10%= 40 V,


overvoltage of TransferPacT
Automatic Differential between dropout and pickup= 40 V * 20%= 8 V

overvoltage dropout is 400 V + 40 V= 440 V

Pickup= 440 V - 8 V= 432 V

Under Frequency

Field Description

Default value • Dropout: 5%


• Pickup: 20% of delta dropout

Range Delta frequency : 2% –10% of rated frequency and could be 2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9–10%..

198 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Field Description

12
10
5 6 714
U 8 8 16
4
6 3 9 18
f
4 2 ( ) 10 20

Differential The differential between dropout and pickup is fixed on automatic HMI and this gap is set at 20%
of the delta.
Sequence of events • When a sensor detects a frequency below the set drop-out frequency for a period longer
than the time delay, it deems the voltage is out of range.
• When the sensor detects a frequency at or above the pick-up point, it deems the frequency
as acceptable.

Example of calculation on For example, Fe= 50 Hz , Dropout 5%= 2.5 Hz,


underfrequency of TransferPacT
Automatic Differential between dropout and pickup= 2.5 Hz * 20%= 0.5Hz

Underfrequency dropout is 50 Hz - 2.5 Hz= 47.5 Hz

Pickup = 47.5 Hz + 0.5 Hz= 48 Hz

Over Frequency

Field Description

Default value • Dropout: 5%


• Pickup: 20% of delta dropout

Range Delta Frequency : 2% -> 10% of rated : could be 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 9 – 10%..

12
10
5 6 714
U 8 8 16
4
6 3 9 18
f
4 2 ( ) 10 20

Differential The differential between dropout and pick up is fixed on automatic HMI and this differential is set at
20% of the delta value.

Sequence of events • When a sensor detects a frequency below the set drop-out frequency for a period longer
than the time delay, it deems the voltage is out of range.
• When the sensor detects a frequency at or above the pick-up point, it deems the frequency
as acceptable.

Example of calculation on For example, Fe= 50 Hz , Dropout 5%= 2.5 Hz,


overfrequency of TransferPacT
Automatic Differential between dropout and pickup= 2.5 Hz * 20%= 0.5 Hz

overfrequency dropout is 50 Hz + 2.5 Hz = 52.5 Hz

Pickup = 52.5 Hz - 0.5 Hz = 52 Hz

DOCA0214EN–01 199
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Time Delay
- Adjust/Range Default
Symbol Display Definition Automatic Automatic

T2 Transfer Delay Confirmation delay on U–U: 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, U-U: 3 s


source power failure 30, 60 s
U-G: 5 s
U-G: 5 s
T4 Center-off Delay OFF position delay 0, 5 s 0s

T6 Re-transfer Delay Confirmation delay to re- 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 1 min


transfer on normal 60 min
source
T7 Genset Start Delay Delay to start Genset U-U: 0s U-U: 0 s

U-G: 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, U-G: 3 s


30, 60 s

T8 Loadshed Delay Delay to load shedding N/A 0s

T9 Genset cool delay Genset cooling down N/A 60 s


delay

T10 Genset fail delay Genset alarming failure N/A 300 s


detection time
T13 On load test delay Time duration to run for N/A 0s
test process on load.

T14 Off load test delay Time duration to run for N/A 0s
test process off load.

NOTE: When the test delay for TransferPacT automatic is requisite, contact
Schneider Electric service team.

T2: Transfer Delay


Field Description

Applications • Confirm connected source has failure.


• Measure the target source power (for example voltage and frequency) during the time delay.
• The delay shall detect both sources, the stop condition will be N recovered, or A source failed.

Default values The default value is 5 s.


Range For Automatic: 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s.

Adjust For Automatic: U-U: 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s; U-G: 5 s

T4: Center-Off Delay


Field Description

Applications • Time delay applied to the center-off position O when Position I and Position II are transferring, it stops at
Position O to protect inductive load.
• The delay is used for both process of transfer to N and A.

Default values The default value is 0 s.


Range For Automatic: 2 settings : 0 s or 5 s.

Adjust For Automatic: 2 settings : 0 s or 5 s.

200 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

T6: Re-Transfer Delay


Field Description

Applications • Time delay applied when transferring from R to N in the Auto-Return mode. This delay is intended to
measure the N and R during the delay.
• If N is abnormal, the timer will stop and the re-transfer is cancelled.
• If R is abnormal but Source N is normal, the switch will transfer immediately.

Default values The default value is 60 s.


Range For Automatic: 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 min.

Adjust For Automatic: Fix value for automatic switch.

T7: Genset Start Delay


Field Description

Applications • Genset startup time delay (time delay before sent the signal to start Genset), available for U-G
applications.
• The time delay only available when there is external power or select the Genset start module.

Default values The default value is 3 s.


Range For Automatic: 0,1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s

Adjust For Automatic: Fix value for automatic switch.

T8: Loadshed Delay


Field Description

Applications • Load shedding delay, for U-U/U-G.


• Load shed: The alternatepower (Genset) sometimes may not afford all loads. A signal from controller will
shed some loads.
• Need customer to decide which load can be shed.
Default values The default value is 0 s.
Range For Automatic: Not applicable.

Adjust For Automatic: Not applicable.

T9: Genset Cool Delay


Field Description

Applications • Delay between closing of N source and send the signal to stop the Genset.
• The propose is to keep the generator running at no load for some time before shutting / cooling down.
• When controller restarts, this time delay will be running also at U-G mode.
NOTE: To prevent any risk of Genset damage due to Genset stopping before the end of its starting process:
Genset cooling time delay can only start after the end of Genset start time delay or after SII is within
tolerances since source return time delay.

Default values For Automatic: Not applicable.

Range For Automatic: Not applicable.

Adjust For Automatic: Not applicable.

DOCA0214EN–01 201
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

T10: Genset Fail Delay


Field Description

Applications • After sending the Genset start signal, controller will wait a time duration T10 until Genset is ready.
• The ATSE shall rise the Genset alarm, if genset is not started while T10 timer is ended (if enabled).
• The ATSE shall reset the Genset alarm, when the R source is in Range or when the N source is in Range.
• The time delay is only available when there is external power.

Default values • The default value is 300 s.


• The alarm can be enabled or disabled. Default as disabled.
Range For Automatic: 300 s.

Adjust For Automatic: Not applicable.

T13: On Load Test Delay


Field Description

Applications Time duration for On load test process. It will rise the alarm if test is not finished in the time duration.

Default values For Automatic: Not applicable.

Range For Automatic: Not applicable.

Adjust For Automatic: Not applicable.

T14: Off Load Test Delay


Field Description

Applications Time duration for off load test process. It will rise the Alarm if test is not finished in the time duration.

Default values For Automatic: Not applicable.

Range For Automatic: Not applicable.

Adjust For Automatic: Not applicable.

202 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Active Automatic HMI with LCD Display as Embedded HMI

Preferable Source Selection


TransferPacT Active Automatic provide an easy way to select the preferred source
as normal source.
When the Genset is at normal power and the Utility is not so stable, make the
selection as below:
For TransferPacT Active Automatic: To select the preferred source, go to Source
Configuration page to make the selection.

Application
Source Config
Utility(N)-SII Utility(A)

03:55

Utility-Utility Operation
1. Detect the normal source contingency (Utility).
2. Transfer the load to replace alternate source (Utility) when normal source is
out of tolerance.
3. Re-transfer to normal source when it is recovered if auto return mode is set.

Utility-Generator Operation
1. Detect the normal source contingency (Utility).
2. Send out Genset start signal when normal source is out of tolerance.
3. Transfer the load to replace source (generator) when generator is ready.
4. Re-transfer to normal alternate source when it is recovered if auto return
mode is set.
5. Send the Genset cool down signal after re-transfer to normal source.

DOCA0214EN–01 203
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Status Description Based on Source Selection


U-U Application
If U-U application is selected, then both Source I and Source II indicator (LED) will
have two status:
• ON (OK)
• Blink (Out of Range)

LED Status Description


Indication
LED ON (on Source present and in the range
both sources)
The display will show OK and LED be ON

System Overview
SI(N - U) SII(A - U) SI SII
OK OK
Load on SI(N)
Auto

LED Blinking When there is power contingency. The display will show the SI status(Out Range)
(on N source) and current application mode.( vice versa for SII)

System Overview
SI(N - U) SII(A - U) SI SII
Out Range
OK
No Voltage
Load on SII(A)
Auto

NOTE: in U-U mode, as long as one source is in range, the other source
indicator will light on.

U-G Application
If U-G application is selected, then Source II/Source I (the one connect to Genset)
will have three status:
• ON (OK)
• Blink (Out of Range)
• OFF if the Genset start signal (need accessory TPCDIO17) is not active

204 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

LED Status Description


Indication
LED OFF (on Genset (for example, SII) start signal is not active
Source A)
The display will show OFF
LED ON (on
Source N)

System Overview
SI(N - U) SII(A - G) SI SII
OK No Voltage
Load on SI(N)
Auto

LED Blinking Genset(SII, e.g.)start signal is sent out, genset is activating but not ready.
(on Source A
and Source N) The display will show Out Range

System Overview
SI(N - U) SII(A - G) SI SII
Out Range Out Range
U<Ue No Voltage
Load on SI(N)
Auto

LED ON (on Genset is running and in range, load is on SII.


both sources)
The display will show ON on SI and ON on SII
LED Blinking
(on both
Source A)
System Overview
SI(N - U) SII(A - G) SI SII
Out Range OK
U<Ue
Load on SII(A)
Auto

The table below explains the status and their occurrences:

Status Occurrences
OFF The status is OFF, when the detected source is genset and the gen start
signal is not sent.

OK The status is OK, when all the enabled detection related to this source are in
range.

Out Range The status is Out Range, when any enabled detection related to this source
are out of range.

The number of possible values depends on the source setting and transfer status:

If... Then...
the source is a Utility source two possible values are OK and Out Range.

the source is a Genset source three possible values are OK, Out Range and
OFF when genset start singal not sent, out of
range when genset is starting or enabled
detection related to genset is not in range.

DOCA0214EN–01 205
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Transfer Condition
The following are the auto-transfer conditions:
• Voltage deviation: Controller monitors two sources, and uses over-voltages
and under-voltages thresholds as conditions of source transfer.
• Frequency deviation: Controller monitors two sources, and uses over-
frequency and under-frequency thresholds as conditions of source transfer.
• Phase rotation: Controller detect two sources phase sequence as the
condition of source transfer (*Active Automatic HMI only).

Threshold
Description Settings Default setting Adjustment range Note
% of nominal increments of 1%

Normal source voltage Under voltage Dropout 85% 70%-95% Step of 1%

Under voltage Pickup 90% 85%-100% Step of 1%

Over voltage Dropout 110% 105%-135% Step of 1%

Over voltage Pickup 105% 100%-115% Step of 1%

Minimum differential 2% –
between Dropout and
pickup

Alternate source voltage Under voltage Dropout 85% 70%-95% Step of 1%

Under voltage Pickup 90% 85%-100% Step of 1%

Over voltage Dropout 110% 105%-135% Step of 1%

Over voltage Pickup 105% 100%-115% Step of 1%

Minimum differential 2% –
between Dropout and
pickup

Normal source frequency Under Frequency 96% 80%-98% Step of 0.5%


Dropout

Under Frequency Pickup 97% 85%-100% Step of 0.5%

Over Frequency Dropout 102% 101%-120% Step of 0.5%

Over Frequency Pickup 101% 100%-115% Step of 0.5%

Minimum differential 0.50% –


between Dropout and
pickup

Alternate source Under Frequency 96% 80%-98% Step of 0.5%


frequency Dropout

Under Frequency Pickup 97% 85%-100% Step of 0.5%

Over Frequency Dropout 102% 101%-120% Step of 0.5%

Over Frequency Pickup 101% 100%-115% Step of 0.5%

Minimum differential 0.50% –


between Dropout and
pickup

Voltage unbalance Default as disabled 2%-30%

Phase rotation enabled


Neutral wrong enabled
connection
Neutral lost disabled unbalance rate

The accuracy of voltage sensing is 1%.


The accuracy of frequency sensing is 0.1%.

206 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Voltage Dropout and Pickup


Voltage value

Over-voltage dropout value

Over-voltage pickup value

Nominal Voltage

Under-voltage pickup value

Under-voltage dropout value

No transfer Conditions No transfer Conditions No transfer


requested for transfer requested for transfer requested

• Over voltage dropout value: Above this value, the voltage is out of range and
transfer is initiated.
• Over voltage pickup value: When voltage goes back from over frequency, it is
a condition to go back to normal situation.
• Under voltage dropout value: Below this value, the frequency is out of range
and transfer is initiated.
• Under voltage pickup value: When voltage goes back from under voltage, it is
a condition to go back to normal situation.

Frequency Dropout and Pickup


Frequency value

Over-frequency dropout value

Over-frequency pickup value

Nominal Frequency

Under-frequency pickup value

Under-frequency dropout value

No transfer Conditions No transfer Conditions No transfer


requested for transfer requested for transfer requested

• Over frequency dropout value: Above this value, the frequency is out of range
and transfer is initiated.
• Over frequency pickup value: When frequency goes back from over
frequency, it is a condition to go back to normal situation.
• Under frequency dropout value: Below this value, the frequency is out of
range and transfer is initiated.

DOCA0214EN–01 207
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

• Under frequency pickup value: When frequency goes back from under
frequency, it is a condition to go back to normal situation.

Voltage and Frequency Setting


For TransferPacT Active Automatic: The rated voltage needs to be set using the
LCD display.

System Param
Rated Voltage
400V

03:54

Undervoltage Thresholds

Field Description

Default value • Dropout: 85% of the rated voltage.


• Pickup: 90% of the rated voltage.

Range • Range for falling voltage (dropout) is 70%-95% of the rated voltage.
• Range for return voltage (pickup) is 85%–100% of the rated voltage.

Adjustable The adjustable step for an undervoltage threshold is 1%.

Differential • The differential between dropout and pickup is equal to 2% of rated voltage.

On LCD display • If minimum 2% differential of rated voltage rule is broken during dropout setting, the pickup
value will be modified dynamically (pickup = dropout + 2%) to keep the rule.

On Modbus Modbus register write: The dropout value is always accepted. The pickup value will be modified to
a value (pickup = dropout + 2%) when the pickup value does not comply the minimum differential.

Sequence of events • When a sensor detects a voltage below the dropout set voltage for a period longer than the
time delay, it will deem the voltage for out of range.
• When a sensor detects a voltage at or above the pickup point, it will deem the voltage as
acceptable.

Overvoltage Thresholds

Field Description

Default value • Dropout: 110% of the rated voltage.


• Pickup: 105% of the rated voltage.

Range • Range for falling voltage (dropout) is 105%–135% of the rated voltage.
• Range for return voltage (pickup) is 100%–105% of the rated voltage.

Adjustable The adjustable step for an overvoltage threshold is 1%.

Differential • The default differential between dropout and pickup is equal to 2% of rated voltage.

On LCD display • If minimum 2% differential of rated voltage in default rule is broken during dropout setting, the
pickup value will be modified (pickup=dropout–2%) to keep the rule.

On Modbus The dropout value is always accepted. The pick-up value will be modified to a value (pickup=
dropout–2%) when the pick-up value does not comply the minimum differential.

Sequence of events • When a sensor detects a voltage below the dropout set voltage, for a period longer than the
time delay, it will deem the voltage for out of range.
• When a sensor detects a voltage at or above the pickup voltage, it will deem the voltage as
acceptable.

208 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Under Frequency

Field Description

Default value • Dropout: 95% of the rated frequency.


• Pickup: 97% of the rated frequency.

Range • Range for falling voltage (dropout) is 80%–95% of rated voltage.


• Range for return voltage (pickup) is 85%–100% of rated voltage.

Adjustable The adjustable step for under frequency threshold is 0.5%.

Differential • The default differential between dropout and pickup is equal to 0.5% of rated frequency.

On LCD display • If minimum differential rule is broken during dropout setting, the pickup value will be modified
(pickup = dropout – 0.5% ) to keep the rule.

On Modbus Dropout value is always accepted, if the pickup value doesn't comply the minimum differential, the
pickup value will be modified to value (pickup = dropout – 0.5%).

Sequence of events • When a sensor detects a frequency below the set drop-out frequency for a period longer
than the time delay, it deems the voltage is out of range.
• When the sensor detects a frequency at or above the pick-up point, it deems the frequency
as acceptable.

Over Frequency

Field Description

Default value • Dropout: 105% of the rated frequency.


• Pickup: 101% of the rated frequency.

Range • The over frequency sensing range for a falling voltage (dropout) is 101%–120% of rated
voltage.
• The over frequency sensing range for a return voltage (pickup) is 100%–115% of rated
voltage.

Adjustable The adjustable step for over frequency threshold is 0.5%.

Differential • The default differential between dropout and pickup = 0.5% of rated frequency.

On LCD • If minimum differential (0.5% of rated in default) rule is broken during dropout setting, the
pickup value will be modified (pickup = dropout – 0.5% ) to keep the rule.

On Modbus Dropout value is always accepted, if the pickup value do not comply the minimum gap, the pickup
value will be modified to value (pickup = dropout – 0.5%).

Sequence of events • When a sensor detects a frequency below the set dropout frequency for a period longer than
the time delay, it deems the voltage is out of range.
• When the sensor detects a frequency at or above the pickup point, it deems the frequency as
acceptable.

Voltage Unbalance

Field Description

Applications The single-phase loading causes a voltage unbalance. When the maximum deviation from average voltage is
greater than a user-specific value of the average voltage, the sensor indicates a failure.
• The voltage unbalance is only for 3P 3-wire.
• The voltage unbalance is only for TransferPacT Active Automatic.

Default value • The voltage unbalance feature can be enabled or disabled. By default, this feature is disabled.
• When there is a voltage unbalance after enabling the sensor, it will raise an alarm and transfer is initiated.
• The default value for voltage unbalance is disabled

Range The adjustment range for voltage unbalance is between 2%–30%.

DOCA0214EN–01 209
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Phase Rotation
Field Description

Applications This feature monitors the phase rotation of the source opposite from the connected source. In order to check
phase rotation, both voltage sources must be applied.

It protects against equipment damage by preventing transfer to a source that is out of phase. This occurs during
new installations or after storm damage or generator rewiring (U-G).
NOTE: Only A-B-C sequence is correct and sequence C-B-A is wrong.
It is available only for TransferPacT Active Automatic.

Default value This feature could be enabled or disabled. By default, it is enabled.

Detection Criteria When the power source is normal, phase angle differences is to be checked (PhaseA – PhaseB/PhaseB – Phase
A). It should be 120°/240°±5° and if the sequence C-B-A, then it is a wrong sequence.

Transfer Count
The TransferPacT controller can count successful and failure transfer counts
separately.
NOTE: Only the TransferPacT Active ATSE will display the transfer count.

Transfer Count
Successful Count:
0
Failure Count:
0
00:03

Neutral Wrong Connections Detections


Field Description

Applications • An alarm is raised when this function is enabled to prevent wrong connection of neutral cable.
• When this function is enabled and neutral wrong is detected, an alarm will be shown to the user on HMI
(only Active Automatic HMI).

Default value This feature could be enabled or disabled. By default, it is disabled.

Detection criteria Consider only the normal power source, and conclude if neutral wrong according to check Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab,
Vbc, Vca.

Example: Consider the neutral wrong when the nominal power source is 380 V. For 380 V system, line voltage
should be 380 V and phase voltage should be 220 V.

Neutral Loss
Field Description

Applications • A warning is raised when this function is enabled to prevent wrong connection, miss connection or
disconnection caused by interior or exterior impacts of neutral cable.
• Only available for TransferPacT Active Automatic.

Default value This feature could be enabled or disabled. By default, it is disabled.

The LED of source will blink to warn when there is neutral loss after the sensor is enabled.
Detection criteria When the load is connected to the power source and live, the unbalanced loads are detected.

210 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Time Delay
- Adjust Range Default
Symbol Display Definition Active automatic Active automatic Active automatic

T2 Transfer Delay Confirmation delay on 0.1 s from 0-1 s. 1 s 0-1800 s 3s


source power failure when >1 s.

T4 Center-off Delay OFF position delay 1s 0-30 s 0s

T6 Re-transfer Delay Confirmation delay to 1s 0-3600 s 60 s


re-transfer on normal
source
T7 Genset Start Delay to start Genset 1s 0-120 s 3s
Delay

T8 Loadshed Delay Delay to load 1s 0-15 s 0s


shedding

T9 Genset cool delay Genset cooling down 1s 0-3600 s 60 s


delay

T10 Genset fail delay Genset alarming 1s 15–300 s 300 s


failure detection time
T13 On load test delay Time duration to run 1s Unlimited: 0 s Unlimited: 0 s
for test process on
load. Limited: 1-1800 s Limited: 30 s

T14 Off load test delay Time duration to run 1s Unlimited: 0 s Unlimited: 0 s
for test process off
load. Limited: 1-1800 s Limited: 30 s

T2: Transfer Delay


Field Description

Applications • Confirm connected source has failure.


• Measure the target source power (for example voltage and frequency) during the time delay.
• The delay shall detect both sources, the stop condition will be N recovered, or A source failed.

Default values For Active Automatic: 3 s.


Range For Active Automatic: 0-1800 s.

Adjust For Active Automatic: Step of 0.1 s from 0-1 s. 1 s when >1 s.

T4: Center-Off Delay


Field Description

Applications • Time delay applied to the center-off position O when Position I and Position II are transferring, it stops at
Position O to protect inductive load.
• The delay is used for both process of transfer to N and A.

Default values The default value is 0 s.


Range For Active Automatic: 0-30 s.

Adjust For Active Automatic: Step of 1 s for Active Automatic.

DOCA0214EN–01 211
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

T6: Re-Transfer Delay


Field Description

Applications • Time delay applied when transferring from R to N in the Auto-Return mode. This delay is intended to
measure the N and R during the delay.
• If N is abnormal, the timer will stop and the re-transfer is cancelled.
• If R is abnormal but Source N is normal, the switch will transfer immediately.

Default values The default value is 60 s.


Range For Active Automatic: 0-60 min.

Adjust For Active Automatic: Step of 1 s for Active Automatic.

T7: Genset Start Delay


Field Description

Applications • Genset startup time delay (time delay before sent the signal to start Genset), available for U-G
applications.
• The time delay only available when there is external power or select the Genset start module.

Default values The default value is 3 s.


Range For Active Automatic: 0-120 s.

Adjust For Active Automatic: Step of 1 s for Active automatic.

T8: Loadshed Delay


Field Description

Applications • Load shedding delay, for U-U/U-G.


• Load shed: The alternate power (Genset) sometimes may not afford all loads. A signal from controller will
shed some loads.
• Need customer to decide which load can be shed.
Default values The default value is 0 s.
Range For Active Automatic: 0-15 s

Adjust For Active Automatic: Step of 1 s for Active automatic.

T9: Genset Cool Delay


Field Description

Applications • Delay between closing of N source and send the signal to stop the Genset.
• The propose is to keep the generator running at no load for some time before shutting / cooling down.
• When controller restarts, this time delay will be running also at U-G mode.
NOTE: To prevent any risk of Genset damage due to Genset stopping before the end of its starting process:
Genset cooling time delay can only start after the end of Genset start time delay or after SII is within
tolerances since source return time delay.

Default values The default value is 60 s.


Range For Active Automatic: 0-60 min.

Adjust For Active Automatic: Step of 1 s for Active automatic.

212 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

T10: Genset Fail Delay


Field Description

Applications • After sending the Genset start signal, controller will wait a time duration T10 until Genset is ready.
• The ATSE shall rise the Genset alarm, if genset is not started while T10 timer is ended (if enabled).
• The ATSE shall reset the Genset alarm, when the R source is in Range or when the N source is in Range.
• The time delay is only available when there is external power.

Default values • The default value is 300 s.


• The alarm can be enabled or disabled. Default as disabled.
Range For Active automatic: 15-300 s.

Adjust For Active Automatic: Step of 1 s for Active automatic.

T13: On Load Test Delay


Field Description

Applications Time duration for On load test process. It will rise the alarm if test is not finished in the time duration.

Default values • Default as unlimited(0 s), has to manual stop test procedure.
• If select limited, default as 30 s.

Range For Active Automatic: 1-1800 s.

Adjust For Active Automatic: Step of 1 s for Active automatic.

T14: Off Load Test Delay


Field Description

Applications Time duration for off load test process. It will rise the Alarm if test is not finished in the time duration.

Default values • Default as unlimited(0 s), has to manual stop test procedure.
• If select limited, default as 30 s.

Range For Active automatic: 1-1800 s.

Adjust For Active Automatic: Step of 1 s for Active automatic.

DOCA0214EN–01 213
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Control Mode
Overview
The control mode is used to operate TSE in different applications. The
TransferPacT Active ATSE contains every function needed with nine control
modes:
• Auto mode
• Test mode
• Communication transfer mode
• Voluntary transfer mode
• Local control mode
• Transfer inhibit mode
• Fire protection mode
• Force to off mode
• Handle transfer mode

The TransferPacT Automatic contains below control modes:


• Auto mode
• Test mode
• Voluntary transfer mode
• Transfer inhibit mode
• Fire protection mode
• Force to off mode
• Handle transfer mode

214 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Priority of Control Mode


Type of Handle Force Fire Inhibit Local Voluntary Comm Test Auto
mode
Handle - I I I I I I I I
transfer
mode
Force to off x - I I I I I I I
mode
Fire x x - I I I I I I
protection
mode
Transfer x x x - I I I I I
inhibit mode
Local control x x x x - I I I I
mode
Voluntary x x x x x - I I I
transfer
mode
Comm x x x x x x - I I
transfer
mode
Test mode x x x x x x x - I
Auto mode x x x x x x x x -

“-“ = No caution

“I” = Interrupt

X = Ignore

DOCA0214EN–01 215
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Auto Mode
ATSE works on auto control mode normally. The controller monitors the real time
values of both the sources. When there is source contingency, the transfer action
will be energized to keep the power continuity for critical source.
Auto mode is supports U-G or U-U applications.
NOTE: Auto transfer will not be active, if transfer action damages driving
system (for example, both sources are out of range, TSE refuses to transfer).
There are two types of auto control mode:
• Auto-return
• Non-return

Naming Condition for stay on A situation return

Power source N available N available


definition
A available A unavailable
Auto-return Switch to N Switch to N
Non-return Stay at A Switch to N

Auto-Return
The auto-return has two modes as below:
• When the voltage on the N source exceeds the threshold (overvoltage,
undervoltage, over frequency, under frequency) or does not exist, the ATSE
will be transferred to the A source.
• When the voltage on the N source is within the threshold range, the ATSE will
be transferred to N source.
The process of transfer can be controlled by time delay.

Transfer Process for Auto-Return U-U Application


I
Un
O

I
Ua
O

I
On
O

I
Oa
O

I
Load
O
T2 T8 T4 T6 T4

0-1800 s 0-15 s 0-30 s 0-60 min 0-15 s

Symbols Description

Un Source I
Ua Source II

On Contact close at N source


Oa Contact close at A source
Load Load status
T2 Transfer delay

T8 Loadshed delay

T4 Center-off delay

216 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Symbols Description

T6 Re-Transfer delay

Key

O: OFF (circuit open)

I: ON (circuit closed)

: No power

Transfer Logic for Auto-Return U-U Application

Switch at Position N

No
N lost A ok?

Yes
No
End T2

End T8

Transfer N-0

End T4

Transfer 0-A

T2 will reset if N becomes available or A becomes unavailable.

DOCA0214EN–01 217
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Switch at Position A

No
N is ok?

Yes

Yes No
A is ok?

No No
End T6 End T2

Yes Yes

Transfer A-0 Transfer A-0

End T4 End T4

Transfer 0-N Transfer 0-N

• T2 will reset if N becomes unavailable


• T6 Reset if N becomes unavailable
• During T6, if A is not available it will keep to count T6 if the rest time of T6 is
shorter than T2. Other wise it goes to T2
• Retransfer principles when source A is ok, retransfer goes to T6 when source
A is not ok and when source A is utility, retransfer goes to T2. If source A is
Genset and not ok, retransfer delay is 0.

Transfer Process for U-G Application


I
Un
O

I
Ua
O

I
On
O

I
Oa
O

I
Load
O
T7 T2 T8 T4 T6 T4 T9

0-120 s 0-1800 s 0-15 s 0-30 s 0-60 min 0-30 s 0-60 min

Symbols Description

Un Source I
Ua Source II
On Contact close at N source
Oa Contact close at A source
Load Load status
T7 Genset start delay

T2 Transfer delay

T8 Loadshed delay

T4 Center-off delay

T6 Re-Transfer delay

218 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Symbols Description

T9 Genset cool delay

Key

O: OFF (circuit open)

I: ON (circuit closed)

: No power

DOCA0214EN–01 219
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Transfer Logic for U-G Application

Switch at Position N

No
N lost?

Yes

Start T7

Yes
A ok?

No

No
End T7?

Yes

Send Genset Start Signal

Start T10

Yes A ok?

No

End T10? No

Yes
Genset Start Alarm

Yes
N ok before T2?

No

End T8

Transfer N-0

End T4

Transfer 0-A

Transfer Logic
• T2 will reset if N becomes unavailable
• If disable Genset Start Fail Warning, T10 will not be counted
• The whole transfer will be canceled if N becomes available during T7

220 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Switch at Position A

No
N is ok?

Yes

Yes No
A is ok?

No Transfer A-0
End T6

Yes
End T4
Transfer A-0

Transfer 0-N
End T4

No
End T9
Transfer 0-N
Yes

No Sent Genset Stop Signal


End T9

Yes

Sent Genset Stop Signal

Retransfer Logic
• T2 will reset if N becomes unavailable
• T6 Reset if N becomes unavailable
• During T6, if A is not available it will keep to count T6 if the rest time of T6 is
shorter than T2. Other wise it goes to T2

DOCA0214EN–01 221
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Non-Return
In the non-return mode, after auto transfer to replacement, the ATSE will be
connected to the alternate source until:
• An external order is given to transfer back to N source.
• The alternate source is out of range. In such case, the ATSE controller will
transfer back to the N source to maintain power availability.
There will be only one time power off, when there is normal power outage.

Transfer Process of Non-return for U-U Application


I
Un
O

I
Ua
O

I
On
O

I
Oa
O

I
Load
O
T2 T8 T4 T2 T4

0-1800 s 0-15 s 0-30 s 0-1800 s 0-15 s

Symbols Description

Un Source I
Ua Source II
On Contact close at N source
Oa Contact close at A source
Load Load status
T2 Transfer delay

T8 Loadshed delay

T4 Center-off delay

Key

O: OFF (circuit open)

I: ON (circuit closed)

: No power

222 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Logic of Non-return for U-U Application

Switch at Position N

No
N lost A ok?

Yes

No
End T2

Yes

End T8

Transfer N-0

End T4

Transfer 0-A

Transfer Logic
T2 will reset if N becomes available or A becomes unavailable

Switch at Position A

No
A is lost?

Yes

No
N is ok?

Yes

No
End T2

Yes

Transfer A-0

End T4

Transfer 0-N

Retransfer Logic
T2 will reset if N becomes unavailable

DOCA0214EN–01 223
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Transfer Process of Non-return for U-G Application


I
Un
O

I
Ua
O

I
On
O

I
Oa
O

I
Load
O
T7 T10 T2 T8 T4 T2 T4 T9

0-120 s 0-1800 s 0-15 s 0-30 s 0-1800 s 0-10 s 0-60 min

Symbols Description

Un Source I
Ua Source II

On Contact close at N source


Oa Contact close at A source
Load Load status
T7 Genset start delay

T2 Transfer delay

T8 Loadshed delay

T4 Center-off delay

T9 Genset cool delay

Key

O: OFF (circuit open)

I: ON (circuit closed)

: No power

224 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Logic of Non-return for U-G Application

Switch at Position N

No
N lost?

Yes

Start T7

Yes
A ok?

No

No
End T7?

Yes

Send Genset Start Signal

Start T10

Yes A ok?

No

End T10? No

Yes
Genset Start Alarm

Yes
N ok before T2?

No

End T8

Transfer N-0

End T4

Transfer 0-A

Transfer Logic
• T2 will reset if N becomes available or A becomes unavailable
• If disable Genset Start Fail Warning, T10 will not be counted

DOCA0214EN–01 225
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Switch at Position A

No
A is Lost?

Yes

No
N is ok?

Yes

End T2 No

Yes

Transfer A-0

End T4

Transfer 0-N

No
End T9

Yes

Sent Genset Stop Signal

Retransfer Logic
T2 will reset if N becomes unavailable

226 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Communication Control
Overview
The communication control function allows TSE to transfer or test through
communication. The switch can refuse to response if the action will damage the
driving system. It cannot transfer to unavailable source either.
The communication control function can be enabled/disabled through Active
Automatic HMI (only available for TransferPacT Active Automatic transfer switch
equipment).
To use the communication control successfully, at least one Modbus module
should be installed and activated.
NOTE: Communication control is OFF by default. Follow the instructions
below to enable communication control.
Set & Operate Operations
Operations Alarm Ack
System Param Local Control
Application Comm Control
Time Delays On Laod Test
03:32 03:21

Comm Control Comm Control Comm Control


Transfer by Comm Transfer by Comm Transfer by Comm
Tips
Test by Comm ON OFF
Save Changes?
OK
23:47 23:47 00:02

Comm Control Comm Control Comm Control


Transfer by Comm Test by Comm Test byTips
Comm
Test by Comm OFF ON
Save Changes?
OK
03:25 23:47 00:02

Transfer by Communication
Transfer Logic Overview
Transfer by communication support the following four commands:
• Comm to Normal Source
• Comm to Alternate Source
• Comm to OFF
• Comm to Exit
The command is sent through PC - Modbus. Comm to N/A is equivalent to the
voluntary transfer mode on the transfer result. Comm to OFF is equivalent to local
control to off in Local Control Mode, but different to Force to Off Mode. The ATSE
will transfer to off after receiving the command without any time delay.
When more than one Modbus modules are installed, the ATSE will only response
to the module which send the command first. It will not response to any command
from other modules until the first module send the Exit command.

DOCA0214EN–01 227
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Step 1

Comm Control Comm Control


Transfer by Comm Transfer by Comm
Test by Comm ON

23:47 23:47

Step 2

Cmd Modbus Cmd Controller


module

Cmd:
Comm to N
Comm to A
Comm to OFF
Comm exit

Comm to N Comm to A
Step 3

Communication System Overview System Overview


mode SI(N - U) SII(A - G) SI(N - U) SII(A - G)
OK OK OK OK
Load on SI(N) Load on SII(A)
Comm to N Comm to A

Comm to OFF Comm to exit

System Overview System Overview


SI(N - U) SII(A - G) SI(N - U) SII(A - G)
OK OK OK OK
OFF Position Load on SI(N)
Comm to OFF Auto

Exit Communication Control Mode


There are three ways to exit communication control mode:
• The Modbus master device send exit command to the active Modbus module
installed on ATSE.
• Turn off Transfer by Comm from active automatic HMI.
• The active Modbus module is offline.

Transfer Logic of Communication to A (U-U Application)

Switch at Position N Switch at Position A Switch at Position OFF

Comm to A Comm to A Comm to A

No A is not ok? No No
A is ok? A is ok?
N is ok

Yes Yes Yes


No No No
End T11 End T2 N is ok? End T12

Yes Yes Yes Yes


End T8 Transfer A-O Transfer O-A
No End T12

Transfer N-O End T4 Yes

Transfer O-N

End T4 Transfer O-N

Transfer O-A

228 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

T11 is internal fixed time delay.

Transfer Logic of Communication to N (U-U Application)

Switch at Position A Switch at Position N Switch at Position OFF

Comm to N Comm to N Comm to N

A is ok? No No No
N is not ok? N is ok?
N is ok? A is ok

Yes Yes Yes


No No No
End T11 End T2 A is ok? End T12

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Transfer A-O End T8 Transfer O-N


No End T12

End T4 Transfer N-O Yes

Transfer O-A

Transfer O-N End T4

Transfer O-A

T11 is internal fixed time delay.

Transfer Logic of Communication to A (U-G Application)


Switch at Position N Switch at Position A Switch at Position OFF

Comm to A Comm to A Comm to A

Sent Genset Start Signal No Sent Genset Start Signal


A is not ok?
N is ok
End T10 End T10
No Yes No
A is ok? A is ok?
Transfer A-O
A is not ok A is not ok
Yes Yes
No End T4 No No
End T11 Rise Genset Start Fail Warning N is ok? End T12 Rise Genset Start Fail Warning

Yes Transfer O-N Yes Yes


End T8 No Transfer O-A
End T12

No
End T9
Transfer N-O Yes

Transfer O-N
Yes
End T4 Sent Genset Stop Signal

Transfer O-A

T11 is internal fixed time delay.

DOCA0214EN–01 229
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Transfer Logic of Communication to N (U-G Application)

Switch at Position A Switch at Position N Switch at Position OFF

Comm to N Comm to N Comm to N

No No No
N is ok N lost? N is ok?

Yes Yes Yes


No Start T7 No
End T11 A is ok? End T12

Yes Yes Yes Yes


A is ok?
Transfer A-0 No Transfer O-N
End T12
No
End T4 No Yes
End T7?
Transfer O-A

Transfer 0-N Yes


Sent Genset Stop Signal

No
End T9
Start T10

Yes
Sent Genset Stop Signal Yes A is ok?

No

No
End T10?

Yes
Genset Start Alarm

Yes N is ok
before T2?

No
End T8

Transfer N-0

End T4

Transfer 0-A

T11 is internal fixed time delay.

Transfer Logic of Communication to OFF


Comm to OFF is equivalent to local control to off in Local Control Mode, but
different to Force to Off Mode. The ATSE will transfer to off after receiving the
command without any time delay. For more information, see Local Control Mode,
page 241.

230 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Test by Communication
Test by communication support the following three commands:
• On Load Test
• Off Load Test
• Test Exit
When more than one Modbus modules are installed, the ATSE will only response
to the module which send the command first. It will not response to any command
from other modules until the first module send the Test Exit command.
When the test is ongoing, ATSE ignores any other signal from active automatic
HMI or DI module (TPCDIO07).
The operation of Test by communication is equivalent to Test mode. For more
information, see Test Mode, page 235
Step 1

Comm Control Comm Control


Transfer by Comm Test by Comm
Test by Comm ON

23:47 23:47

Step 2

Cmd Modbus Cmd Controller


module

Cmd:
On load test
Off load test
Test exit

Step 3

Test by
communicaion

Stop Test by Communication


There are three ways to stop the test:
• The Modbus master device send Test Exit command to the active Modbus
module installed on ATSE.
• Turn off Test by Comm from active automatic HMI.
• The active Modbus module is offline.

DOCA0214EN–01 231
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Voluntary Transfer Mode


The voluntary transfer mode is equivalent to auto-priority mode on one source,
with forced priority to the SI or SII source. It is activated when associated input is
closed (The commercial reference number for the voluntary remote control
module is TPCDIO08). It takes over 200 ms to active the voluntary mode. The
signal for voluntary transfer should be constant.
Voluntary transfer is normally used for special tariffs. Once the mode is set from
voluntary to N or A, ATSE is still remains in auto mode. When there is power
contingency on target source, transfer switch can re-transfer to available source
automatically.
NOTE: Auto transfer will not be active, if transfer action damages driving
system (for example, both sources are out of range, TSE refuses to transfer) .
The following are the voluntary transfer mode use cases:

Use Case 1: Typhon Mode


During typhoon or earthquake, the Genset will be more stable than utility. The user
for this case has installed a typhoon mode switch on his control panel. The user
will activate the typhoon mode switch. It is connected to the input voluntary
transfer mode which will transfer to alternate source (need accessory to have
function of voluntary transfer using TPCDIO08 accessories). The ATSE will now
activate the Genset output and will transfer to Genset once ready.
Now during the typhoon, the Genset is flooded. The ATSE will still be in auto
mode. It detects alternate source failure. If the normal source is fine, it will try to
transfer to normal source (voluntary is still an auto mode, and we have auto-
return). If the normal source is not available then ATSE will not do any transfer.
Still during typhoon, the Genset can restart (it was a fuel level problem). As the
typhoon mode switch is still enabled, the ATSE will transfer back to the Genset.
The Genset output keeps activate.
So, whatever the source is connected, the typhoon is gone. The utility is back to
normal. The user will deactivate the typhoon mode switch. The ATSE will be
transfer back to normal source at auto mode with auto-return, U-G.
The configuration needed is a ATSE along with voluntary transfer module. With
this configuration, the user don’t need to play with any ATSE settings (return
mode, priority source, what is the normal source).

Use Case 2: Peak Tariff (Align with Controller UA/BA)


Initially this feature was created in UA BA in France for Special Tariff Fare (STF)
capability. Special Tariff Fare (STF) in France is a special electricity pricing that
allows to have discount price on low consumption hours, with the drawback of
having a very expensive kWh price on peak hours. With this option, EDF (French
utility) provides an output on the energy meter to warn the end user about the
price increase. This output is wired on the voluntary transfer input of the controller,
which automatically transfers the load to a cheaper alternate source. This allows
to help shedding the peaks on the network

232 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Transfer Logic of Voluntary to A (U-U Application)

Switch at Position N Switch at Position A Switch at Position OFF

Voluntary to A Voluntary to A Voluntary to A

No
No No A is ok?
A is ok? A is not ok?
N is ok

Yes Yes Yes


No
No No N is ok? End T12
End T11 End T2

Yes Yes
Yes Yes
No Transfer O-A
End T8 Transfer A-O End T12

Yes
Transfer N-O End T4
Transfer O-N

End T4 Transfer O-N

Transfer O-A

T11 is internal fixed time delay

Transfer Logic of Voluntary to N (U-U Application)


Switch at Position A Switch at Position N Switch at Position OFF

Voluntary to N Voluntary to N Voluntary to N

No
A is ok? No No N is ok?
N is not ok?
N is ok? A is ok

Yes Yes Yes


No
No No A is ok? End T12
End T11 End T2

Yes Yes
Yes Yes
No Transfer O-N
Transfer A-O End T8 End T12

Yes
End T4 Transfer N-O
Transfer O-A

Transfer O-N End T4

Transfer O-A

T11 is internal fixed time delay

DOCA0214EN–01 233
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Transfer Logic of Voluntary to A (U-G Application)


Switch at Position N Switch at Position A Switch at Position OFF

Voluntary to A Voluntary to A Voluntary to A

Sent Genset Start Signal No Sent Genset Start Signal


A is not ok?
N is ok
End T10 Yes End T10
No No
A is ok? A is ok?
Transfer A-O
A is not ok
Yes A is not ok
Yes
No End T4 No No
End T11 N is ok? End T12 Rise Genset Start Fail Warning
Rise the Genset Start Fail Warning
Yes Yes
Transfer O-N Yes
End T8 No Transfer O-A
End T12

No
End T9 Yes
Transfer N-O
Transfer O-N
Yes

End T4 Sent Genset Stop Signal

Transfer O-A

T11 is internal fixed time delay

Transfer Logic of Voluntary to N (U-G Application)


Switch at Position A Switch at Position N Switch at Position OFF

Voluntary to N
Voluntary to N Voluntary to N

No No No
N is ok? N lost? N is ok?

Yes Yes
Yes
Start T7 No
No End T11 A is ok? End T12

Yes Yes Yes


A ok? Yes

Transfer A-0 No Transfer O-N


End T12
No

No Yes
End T7?
End T4
Transfer O-A
Yes

Transfer 0-N
Send Genset Start Signal

No Start T10
End T9

Yes
Yes A ok?
Sent Genset Stop Signal
No

End T10? No

Yes
Genset Start Alarm

Yes
N ok before T2?

No

End T8

Transfer N-0

End T4

Transfer 0-A

T11 is internal fixed time delay

234 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Test Mode
The test mode is a procedure to simulate the transfer process with following
purpose:
• Test normal transfer actions for ATSE-On load test.
• Test Genset-Off load test
• Test Genset-Transfer functions-On load test

Ways to Start Test


There are three ways to start the test:
• Through Active Automatic HMI.
• Through DI using TPCDIO07 module.
• Through Modbus communication using TPCCOM16 module.
There is no priority among the test command from HMI, DI and Modbus. ATSE will
act upon receiving the command from any way.
When the test is ongoing, ATSE ignores any other command until receiving the
command to exit test.
Command to exit test should be sent through the same way used to start the test.
Otherwise ATSE will not response. For example, if you start the test through DI
module, you have to stop the test through DI module as well.

Default Time for Test


• Default as unlimited test (No time duration, has to stop the test manually).
• If select limited test, the default time duration is 30 s.

Time Range for Test


• 1s–1800 s with steps of 1 s.
• Time delay can be bypassed by pressing ESC key in Active Automatic HMI.

Pre-Condition to Start Test Mode


The following conditions are mandatory for the test:
• ATSE is in auto mode.
• ATSE is in normal position while in U to U Application.
• ATSE is in alternate position while in U to U Application.
• ATSE is in normal position while in U to G Application.
• For U-U application, A source shall be available before test. Otherwise, there
will be an alarm.
NOTE: On load test will not be active, if transfer action damage driving system
(for example, both sources are out of range, TSE refuses to transfer).

DOCA0214EN–01 235
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Off Load Test


• The purpose of this function is to check the Genset can start, without power
interruption.
NOTE:
◦ This test does not check if the switch is able to make the transfer.
◦ The test is only available with U-G configuration.
• The offload test should not be proposed, when the ATSE doesn’t have
Genset output feature.
• This function will only be accessible for product with HMI, as the Test mode
default value is On load.
• The orders from higher priority will interrupt the test procedure.

Switch at Position N Switch at Position N

Off load test Off load test

No No
N is ok Exit off load test N is ok Exit off load test

Yes Yes

Sent Genset Start Signal Sent Genset Start Signal

Test stop End T14

No No
A is ok? A is ok?

Yes
Yes

Sent Genset Stop Signal Log Test failure Sent Genset Stop Signal Log Test failure

T14 is Unlimited T14 is Limited

On Load Test
• The purpose of this function is to execute ATSE transfer (when the source is
still valid) to make sure the system is still able to execute the transfer. The U-
U and U-G configuration are both available.
• When the ATSE receive the testing start request:
◦ The ATSE shall initiate the transfer to the Alternate source if the Alternate
source is in range, and according to the transfer delays (T7, T2…).
◦ The ATSE shall log a test start event.
• Two conditions to return to N source:
◦ When the ATSE receive the stop request from user.
◦ When the Test timer is activated, and the test timer is completed.

236 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Logic of On Load Test U-U


Switch at Position N Switch at Position N

On load test On load test

N is ok? No N is ok? No
Exit on load test Exit on load test
A is ok? A is ok?

Yes Yes

No No
End T2 End T2

Yes Yes

End T8 End T8

Transfer N-0 Transfer N-0

End T4 End T4

No No
Transfer 0-A A is ok? Exit on load test Transfer 0-A A is ok? Exit on load test

Yes Yes

Test stop
No
End T14 Exit on load test

Yes
No
N ok/A ok
Transfer A-0
Yes

No End T4
End T6

Yes
Transfer 0-N
Transfer A-0
Limited Test

End T4

Transfer 0-N

Unlimited Test

DOCA0214EN–01 237
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Logic of On Load Test U-G


Switch at Position N

On load test

N lost? Yes Exit on load test

No
Start T7

Yes
A ok?

No

No
End T7?

Yes

Send Genset Start Signal

Start T10

Yes A ok?

No

End T10? No

Yes
Genset Start Alarm

Yes
N ok before T2?

No

End T8

Transfer N-0

End T4

Transfer 0-A No Exit on load test


A is ok?

Yes

End T14

No
N is ok?

Yes

Transfer A-0

End T4

Transfer 0-N

No
End T9

Yes

Sent Genset Stop Signal

Limited Test

238 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Switch at Position N

On load test

N lost? Yes Exit on load test

No
Start T7

Yes
A ok?

No

No
End T7?

Yes

Send Genset Start Signal

Start T10

Yes A ok?

No

End T10? No

Yes
Genset Start Alarm

Yes
N ok before T2?

No

No Exit on load test


End T2

Yes

End T8

Transfer N-0

End T4

Transfer 0-A No Exit on load test


A is ok?

Yes

Test stop

No
N is ok?

Yes

No
End T6

Yes

Transfer A-0

End T4

Transfer 0-N

No
End T9

Yes

Sent Geneset Stop Signal

Unlimited Test

DOCA0214EN–01 239
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Return or Start from Auto Mode at Off Position


When switch is at OFF position, this state is interim, and it happens under two
conditions:
• Enter the auto mode from other modes or from power on.
• End of off delay (T4), ATSE is unable to switch to N or A, due to both power
source loss (with 24 V).
The load shedding will be activated from OFF to A source in both U-U and U-G
configuration.

Switch at Position OFF

One source is ok

No Voluntary to A Yes
or Comm to A?
Yes No No Yes
N is ok? A is ok?

No End T12? End T12? No


No No
A is ok? N is ok?
Yes Yes
Transfer O-N Genset Start Signal Yes Yes Genset Start Signal Transfer O-A

End T12? No No End T12?

Yes Yes
Transfer O-A Transfer O-N

T12 is internal fixed time delay.

240 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Local Control Mode

CAUTION
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Enable the local control through Active Automatic HMI to exit the auto mode.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

NOTICE
POTENTIAL POWER OUTAGE OF EQUIPMENT
To re-enter Auto mode, disable local control through Active Automatic HMI or
External HMI.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The local mode is activated through the HMI (only available for Active Automatic
HMI). It allows locally to change the logical position of the TSE. The switch will
refuse to active if the action will damage the driving system. It cannot transfer to
unavailable source.
NOTE: Local transfer will not be active, if transfer action damage driving
system (for example, both sources are out of range, TSE refuses to transfer)
or both sources are out of operating voltage of solenoid.
Auto Genset start signal and load shedding signal is not available for this mode. In
this case, the target source conformity is verified before transfer and time delays
are not considered.

DOCA0214EN–01 241
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on ATSE

Set & Operate Operations Local Control


Operations Warning Ack Enable Local Control
System Param Alarm Ack
Application Local Control
Time Delays On Laod Test
03:32 03:21 23:47

Local Control Local Control Local Control Keys


EnableTips
Local Control Disable Local Control Disable Local Control
Tips
Enable? Transfer to SI(N) Transfer to SI(N)
Disable?
Transfer to SII(A) Transfer to SII(A)
OK Transfer to OFF Transfer toOK
OFF
00:02 03:25 00:06

Local Control Local Control


Disable Local Control Disable Local Control
Tips
Transfer to SI(N) Transfer to SI(N)
Confirm?
Transfer to SII(A) Transfer to SII(A)
Transfer to OFF Transfer toOK
OFF
11:47 11:47

Local Control Local Control


Disable Local Control Disable Local Control
Tips
Transfer to SI(N) Transfer to SI(N)
Confirm?
Transfer to SII(A) Transfer to SII(A)
Transfer to OFF Transfer toOK
OFF
11:48 11:48

Local Control Local Control


Transfer to SI(N) Transfer
Tipsto SI(N)
Transfer to SII(A) Transfer to SII(A)
Confirm?
Transfer to OFF Transfer to OFF
OK
11:48 11:48

Local Control to N
The command is sent through HMI. There is no time delay except OFF delay.
The switch will transfer to normal after receiving the order to it when normal power
is in tolerance.

Local Control to A
The command is sent through HMI. There is no time delay except OFF delay.
The switch will transfer to alternate after receiving the order to it when alternate
power is in tolerance.

Local Control to O
The command is send through HMI. There shall be no time delay. The switch will
transfer to OFF after receiving the order to it.

242 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on ATSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Transfer Inhibit Mode


When the transfer inhibition input is active, the controller can not send any order to
TSE. Front face selection buttons are locked and the HMI only display transfer
inhibit.
Fire, Force to OFF and Handle mode still works as before. When exit Fire, Force
to OFF and Handle mode, transferring blocked by transfer inhibit.
Use this mode only when inhibit signal (from DI) is active and no higher operation
mode is running. When ATS transfer is ongoing, wait until transfer completed.
Exit this mode after inhibit signal is inactive.
Accessories are required using TPCDIO07 to extend this function of the TSE.

Application
• Transfer inhibit occurs when there is power interruption because of short
circuit.
• This function can be used to lock the controller by customized signals.
• This function can be used for cooperation with different ATSE.

Fire Protection Mode


• An emergency stop order to transfer ATSE to off position. All the other
transfer mode will be canceled except force to OFF and handle control. There
shall be no time delay.
• Exit fire protection after signal disappeared.
• Require accessories TPCDIO10 or TPCDIO11 or TPCDIO13 or TPCDIO14 to
extend this function.

Application
• The fire protection signal can transfer ATSE to off position when there is fire
emergency.

Force to Off Mode


• Transfer ATSE to OFF position with an emergency stop order. All the other
transfer mode will be canceled except handle control. There should be no
time delay.
• Exit Force after signal disappeared.
• Accessories are required using TPCDIO07 to extend this function of TSE.

Handle Transfer Mode


• The handle or manual transfer mode is activated from the TSE directly. It
deactivates the controller control function except position status (outputs and
LEDs), source status LEDs and alarm LED.
• No operation for load shedding and generator, keep the status as before.
• No alarm relay output.

DOCA0214EN–01 243
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Operations on RTSE

Operations on RTSE
What’s in This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................... 245
Remote Transfer Process ............................................................................ 245
Remote Transfer Condition .......................................................................... 245

244 DOCA0214EN–01
Operations on RTSE Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Overview
The RTSE transfers to a stable position after receiving a rising edge signal. The
rising edge signal should last for no less than 200 ms.
The RTSE will remain on the stable position until receiving a new signal. It will not
respond to the new signal when:
• Position slider is in the left and transfer switch equipment is in RUN mode.
• Transfer switch equipment is in alarm state.
• Transfer switch equipment is executing the transfer action.

Remote Transfer Process


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Transfer to S2
200 ms 200 ms

Transfer to Off
200 ms

Transfer to S1 200 ms
POS_S2 POS_S2
POS_OFF
Position POS_S1 POS_S1

: No requirement on the signal voltage level. It can either be high or low level.

Remote Transfer Condition


If either source is in range, transfer will be successful. If both sources are out of
range, remote transfer command will still be responded, but the result of
transferring to the target source is not guaranteed. for more information, refer to
Below is the supported voltage deviation range for RTSE with different rated
voltage:
• 380–440 V: 274 - 517 V
• 208–240 V: 174 -280 V

DOCA0214EN–01 245
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Modbus Communication
What’s in This Chapter
Introduction................................................................................................. 247
Modbus Master-Slave Principle .................................................................... 247
Modbus Functions ....................................................................................... 251
Modbus Exception Codes ............................................................................ 254
Modbus Registers ....................................................................................... 255

246 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Introduction
The Modbus communication option enables Schneider Electric low voltage
switches to be connected to a supervisor or to any other device with a master
Modbus communication channel.

Modbus Master-Slave Principle


Overview
The Modbus protocol exchanges information using a request-reply mechanism
between a master (client) and a slave (server). The master-slave principle is a
model for a communication protocol in which one device (the master) controls one
or more other devices (the slaves). In a standard Modbus network, there is 1
master and up to 31 slaves.
A detailed description of the Modbus protocol is available at www.modbus.org.

Characteristics of the Master-Slave Principle


The master-slave principle is characterized as follows:
• Only 1 master is connected to the network at a time.
• Only the master can initiate communication and send requests to the slaves.
• The master can address each slave individually using its specific address or
all slaves simultaneously using address 0.
• The slaves can only send replies to the master.
• The slaves cannot initiate communication, either to the master or to other
slaves.

Master-Slave Communication Modes


The Modbus protocol can exchange information using 2 communication modes:
• unicast mode
• broadcast mode

DOCA0214EN–01 247
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Unicast Mode
In unicast mode, the master addresses a slave using the specific address of the
slave. The slave processes the request then replies to the master.

1 Request
2 Process
3 Reply

Broadcast Mode
The master can also address all slaves using address 0. This type of exchange is
called broadcasting. The slaves do not reply to broadcasting messages.

248 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Response Time
The response time Tr is the time needed by a slave to respond to a request sent
by the master:

Values with the Modbus protocol:


• Typical value < 10 ms for 90% of the exchanges
• To normal messages, Tr maximum value is around 700 ms, so it is
recommended to implement a 1 second time out after sending a Modbus
request.

Data Exchange
The Modbus protocol uses 2 types of data:
• Single bit
• Register (16 bits)
Each register has a register number. Each type of data (bit or register) has a 16-bit
address.
The messages exchanged with the Modbus protocol contain the address of the
data to be processed.

Registers and Addresses


The address of register number n is n-1. The tables detailed in the following parts
of this document provide both register numbers (in decimal format) and
corresponding addresses (in hexadecimal format). For example, the address of
register number 12000 is 0x2EDF (11999).

Frames
All the frames exchanged with the Modbus RTU protocol have a maximum size of
256 bytes and are composed of 4 fields:

Field Definition Size Description

1 Slave number 1 byte Destination of the request


• 0: broadcasting (all slaves concerned)
• 1–247: unique destination

2 Function codes Only 1 byte Refer to Modbus Functions, page 251

3 Data n registers Request or reply data

4 Check 2 bytes CRC16 (to check transmission errors)

DOCA0214EN–01 249
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Default Settings
Followings are the default settings of Modbus communication.

Item Setting

Baud rate 19200 bps

Data 8 bits
Parity Even

Stop 2 bits

Address 1

250 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Modbus Functions
General Description
The Modbus protocol offers a number of functions that are used to read or write
data over the Modbus network. The Modbus protocol also offers diagnostic and
network-management functions.
Only the Modbus functions handled by the ATSE are described here.

Read Functions
The following read functions are available:

Function Code Subfunction Code Name Description

3 (0x03) – Read holding registers Read n output or internal registers

43 (0x2B) 14 (0x0E) Read device identification Read the identification data of the slave

43 (0x2B) 15 (0x0F) Get date and time Read the date and time of the slave

Read Register Example


The following table shows how to read the SI voltage in register 2000. The
address of register 2000 is 2000-1=1999 = 0x07CF. The Modbus address of the
Modbus slave is 47 = 0x2F.

Master Request Slave Reply

Field Name Example Field Name Example

Modbus slave address 0x2F Modbus slave address 0x2F


Function code 0x03 Function code 0x03
Address of the register to read (MSB) 0x07 Data length in bytes 0x02

Address of the register to read (LSB) 0xCF Register value (MSB) 0x02

Number of registers (MSB) 0x00 Register value (LSB) 0x2B

Number of registers (LSB) 0x01 CRC (MSB) 0xXX

CRC (MSB) 0xXX CRC (LSB) 0xXX

CRC (LSB) 0xXX –

Get Date and Time Example


The following table shows how to get the date and time of a Modbus slave. The
Modbus address of the Modbus slave is 47 = 0x2F.

Master Request Slave Reply

Field Name Example Field Name Example

Modbus slave address 0x2F Modbus slave address 0x2F


Function code 0x2B Function code 0x2B
Subfunction code 0x0F Subfunction code 0x0F
Reserved 0x00 Reserved 0x00
– – Date and time Refer to the DATETIME data type

DOCA0214EN–01 251
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Set Date and Time Example


The following table shows how to set date and time of a Modbus slave. The
Modbus address of the Modbus slave is 47 = 0x2F, the new date is October 2,
2014, and the new time is 2:32:03:500 p.m.
NOTE: Use the broadcast mode (with Modbus slave address = 0) to set the
date and time of all Modbus slaves.

Master Request Slave Reply

Field Name Example Field Name Example

Modbus slave address 0x2F Modbus slave address 0x2F


Function code 0x2B Function code 0x2B
Subfunction code 0x10 Subfunction code 0x10
Reserved1 0x00 Reserved1 0x00
Not used 0x00 Not used 0x00
Year = 2014 0x0E Year = 2014 0x0E
Month = October 0x0A Month = October 0x0A
Day Of Month = 2 0x02 Day Of Month = 2 0x02

Hour = 14 0x0E Hour = 14 0x0E


Minutes = 32 0x20 Minutes = 32 0x20
3 sec. 500 ms 0x0DAC 3 sec. 502 ms 0x0DAE

The normal response is an echo of the request, returned after the date-time has
been updated in the remote device. If the date-time structure content is not
consistent with a true date-time (that is, an invalid date-time), the value returned in
the Date-Time field is set to 0 by the device.
In case of 24 Vdc power loss, the date and time of the Modbus slaves without
battery is not refreshed anymore. It is therefore mandatory to set date and time for
all Modbus slaves after recovering the 24 Vdc power supply.
Furthermore, due to the clock drift of each Modbus slave, it is mandatory to set
date and time for all Modbus slaves periodically. Recommended period is at least
every 15 minutes.

Scattered Holding Register Read Function


The scattered holding register read function is available:

Function Subfunction Code Name Description

100 (0x64) 4 (0x04) Read scattered holding register Read n non-contiguous registers

The scattered holding register read function enables the user to:
• avoid reading a large block of contiguous registers when only few registers
are needed
• avoid multiple use of functions 3 and 4 in order to read non-contiguous
registers

252 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Read Scattered Holding Register Example


The following table shows how to read the addresses of the register 1022
(address 0x03FD) and register 1100 (address 0x044B) of a Modbus slave. The
Modbus address of the Modbus slave is 47 = 0x2F.

Master Request Slave Reply

Field Name Example Field Name Example

Modbus slave address 0x2F Modbus slave address 0x2F


Function code 0x64 Function code 0x64
Data length in bytes 0x06 Data length in bytes 0x06

Subfunction code 0x04 Subfunction code 0x04


Transmission number(1) 0xXX Transmission number(1) 0xXX

Address of first register to read (MSB) 0x03 Value of the first register read (MSB) 0x12

Address of first register to read (LSB) 0xFD Value of the first register read (LSB) 0x0A

Address of second register to read (MSB) 0x04 Value of the second register read (MSB) 0x74

Address of second register to read (LSB) 0x4B Value of the second register read (LSB) 0x0C

CRC (MSB) 0xXX CRC (MSB) 0xXX

CRC (LSB) 0xXX CRC (LSB) 0xXX

(1) The master gives the transmission number in the request. The slave returns the same number in the reply.

Write Functions
The following write functions are available:

Function Code Subfunction Code Name Description

6 (0x06) – Preset single register Write 1 register

16 (0x10) – Preset multiple registers Write n registers

43 (0x2B) 16 (0x10) Set date and time Write the date and time of the slave

DOCA0214EN–01 253
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Modbus Exception Codes


Exception Responses
Exception responses from either the master (client) or a slave (server) can result
from data processing errors. One of the following events can occur after a request
from the master (client):
• If the slave (server) receives the request from the master (client) without a
communication error and can handle the request correctly, it returns a normal
response.
• If the slave (server) does not receive the request from the master (client) due
to a communication error, it does not return a response. The master program
eventually processes a timeout condition for the request.
• If the slave (server) receives the request from the master (client) but detects a
communication error, it does not return a response. The master program
eventually processes a timeout condition for the request.
• If the slave (server) receives the request from the master (client) without a
communication error, but cannot handle it (for example, the request is to read
a register that does not exist), the slave returns an exception response to
inform the master of the nature of the error.

Exception Frame
The slave sends an exception frame to the master to report an exception
response. An exception frame is composed of 4 fields:

Field Definition Size Description

1 Slave number 1 byte Destination of the request


• 1–247: unique destination

2 Exception function code 1 byte Request function code + 128 (0x80)

3 Exception code n bytes See next paragraph

4 Check 2 bytes CRC16 (to check transmission errors)

Exception Codes
The exception response frame has two fields that differentiate it from a normal
response frame:
• The exception function code of the exception response is equal to the
function code of the original request plus 128 (0x80).
• The exception code depends on the communication error that the slave
encounters.
The following table describes the exception codes handled by the ATSE:

Exception Name Description


Code
01 (0x01) Illegal function The function code received in the request is not an authorized action for the slave. The slave
may be in the wrong state to process a specific request.

02 (0x02) Illegal data address The data address received by the slave is not an authorized address for the slave.

03 (0x03) Illegal data value The value in the request data field is not an authorized value for the slave.

04 (0x04) Slave device failure The slave fails to perform a requested action because of an unrecoverable error.

254 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Modbus Registers
The main information needed for remote supervision of a TransferPacT Switching
Equipment is contained in the table of common registers starting at register 1001.
One Modbus read request is limited to 125 registers maximum. Three Modbus
read requests are necessary to read the entire table.
Use of these common registers is highly recommended to optimize response
times and simplify the use of data.

Table Format
Register tables have the following columns:

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber

• Address: a 16-bit register address in hexadecimal. The address is the data


used in the Modbus frame.
• Register: a 16-bit register number in decimal (register = address + 1).
• Pole number: number of poles that are applicable for that register.
• RW: register read-write status
◦ R: the register can be read by using Modbus functions
◦ W: the register can be written by using Modbus functions
◦ RW: the register can be read and written by using Modbus functions
◦ RC: the register can be read by using the command interface
◦ WC: the register can be written by using the command interface
• Unit: the unit the information is expressed in.
• Type: the encoding data type (see data type description below).
• Range: the permitted values for this variable, usually a subset of what the
format allows.
• TA: type of TransferPacT switch for which the register is available.
• Bit: bit position applicable for that register.
• Description: provides information about the register and restrictions that
apply.

TransferPacT Switching Equipment Register


Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description
num- ge
ber
0x03E8 1001 ALL R – BOOL – TA 2 Switch N position
• 0 = Open
• 1 = Close
0x03E8 1001 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Switch A position
UM
• 0 = Open
• 1 = Close
0x03E8 1001 ALL R – BOOL – TA 0 Switch OFF position
• 0 = Open
• 1 = Close
0x03E8 1001 ALL R – BOOL – TA 1 Switch position

DOCA0214EN–01 255
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
• 1 = N position open/close
• 2 = A position open/close
• 4 = OFF position open/close

0x03EA 1003 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Normal Source State


UM
• 0 = Source in range
• 1 = Source out of range
• 2 = No voltage

0x03EC 1005 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Alternate source State


UM
• 0 = Source in range
• 1 = Source out of range
• 2 = No voltage

0x03ED 1006 4P R – BOOL – TA 0 SI phase sequence error validity


• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03ED 1006 4P R – BOOL – TA 1 SI neutral position wrong validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03ED 1006 3P/4P R – BOOL – TA 2 SI unbalance voltage validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03ED 1006 4P R – BOOL – TA 3 SI neutral loss alarm validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03ED 1006 ALL R – BOOL – TA 4 SI over voltage state validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03ED 1006 ALL R – BOOL – TA 5 SI under voltage state validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03ED 1006 ALL R – BOOL – TA 6 SI over frequency state validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03ED 1006 ALL R – BOOL – TA 7 SI under frequency state validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03EE 1007 4P R – BOOL – TA 0 SI phase sequence error
• 1 = Yes
0x03EE 1007 4P R – BOOL – TA 1 SI neutral position wrong
• 1 = Yes
0x03EE 1007 3P/4P R – BOOL – TA 2 SI unbalance voltage status
• 1 = Yes
0x03EE 1007 4P R – BOOL – TA 3 SI neutral loss alarm
• 1 = Yes
0x03EE 1007 ALL R – BOOL – TA 4 SI over voltage state
• 1 = Yes
0x03EE 1007 ALL R – BOOL – TA 5 SI under voltage state
• 1 = Yes
0x03EE 1007 ALL R – BOOL – TA 6 SI over frequency state
• 1 = Yes
0x03EE 1007 ALL R – BOOL – TA 7 SI under frequency state
• 1 = Yes

256 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
0x03EF 1008 4P R – BOOL – TA 0 SII phase sequence error validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03EF 1008 4P R – BOOL – TA 1 SII neutral position wrong validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03EF 1008 3P/4P R – BOOL – TA 2 SII unbalance voltage validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03EF 1008 4P R – BOOL – TA 3 SII neutral loss alarm validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03EF 1008 ALL R – BOOL – TA 4 SII over voltage state validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03EF 1008 ALL R – BOOL – TA 5 SII under voltage state validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03EF 1008 ALL R – BOOL – TA 6 SII over frequency state validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03EF 1008 ALL R – BOOL – TA 7 SII under frequency state validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = Valid
0x03F0 1009 4P R – BOOL – TA 0 SII phase sequence error
• 1 = Yes
0x03F0 1009 4P R – BOOL – TA 1 SII neutral position wrong
• 1 = Yes
0x03F0 1009 3P/4P R – BOOL – TA 2 SII unbalance voltage status
• 1 = Yes
0x03F0 1009 4P R – BOOL – TA 3 SII neutral loss alarm
• 1 = Yes
0x03F0 1009 ALL R – BOOL – TA 4 SII over voltage state
• 1 = Yes
0x03F0 1009 ALL R – BOOL – TA 5 SII under voltage state
• 1 = Yes
0x03F0 1009 ALL R – BOOL – TA 6 SII over frequency state
• 1 = Yes
0x03F0 1009 ALL R – BOOL – TA 7 SII under frequency state
• 1 = Yes
0x03FC 1021 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Load shedding function supported
UM
• 1 = Supported

0x03FD 1022 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Load shedding status


UM • 0 = Inactive
• 1 = Active
0x03FE 1023 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Genset control status supported
UM
• 1 = Supported

0x03FF 1024 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Genset control status


UM
• 0 = Inactive
• 1 = Active
• 2 = Unable to control

DOCA0214EN–01 257
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
0x044B 1100 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Runtime mode
UM
• 0 = Init
• 1 = Auto
• 2 = Test
• 3 = Voluntary
• 4 = Remote
• 5 = Local
• 6 = Inhibit
• 7 = Fire
• 8 = Force2off
• 9 = Fatal
• 10 = Handle
0x044F 1104 ALL R/W s FLOAT32 – TA – Generator Ready Alarm Delay T10
• 15 ~ 300
0x07CF 2000 3P/4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI VAB
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x07D1 2002 3P/4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI VBC
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x07D3 2004 3P/4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI VCA
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x07D5 2006 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SI Frequency
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x07D7 2008 2P/4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI VAN
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x07D9 2010 4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI VBN
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x07DB 2012 4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI VCN
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x07DD 2014 3P/4P R % FLOAT32 – TA – SI Voltage unbalance rate
• 0 ~ 100.0
0x0833 2100 3P/4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII VAB
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x0835 2102 3P/4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII VBC
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x0837 2104 3P/4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII VCA
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x0839 2106 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SII Frequency
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x083B 2108 2P/4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII VAN
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x083D 2110 4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII VBN
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x083F 2112 4P R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII VCN
• 0 ~ 6553.5
0x0841 2114 3P/4P R % FLOAT32 – TA – SII Voltage unbalance rate
• 0 ~ 100.0
0x0BB9 3002 ALL R/W V FLOAT32 – TA – Source rated voltage

258 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber

Product Pol- Rat- Rated


series e ed volt-
nu- volt- age
mb- age range
er in HMI
Frame 2P 220 220 V/
100 V 230 V/
240 V/
250 V
Frame 3P/ 38- 380 V/
100 and 4P 0– 400 V/
Frame 440 415 V/
160 V 440 V
Frame 3P/ 20- 208 V/
250 and 4P 8– 220 V/
Frame 240 230 V/
630 V 240 V
Frame 3P/ 38- 380 V/
250 and 4P 0– 400 V/
Frame 440 415 V/
630 V 440 V

0x0BBB 3004 ALL R/W Hz FLOAT32 – TA – Source rated frequency


• 50 or 60
0x0BBD 3006 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Source neutral position
UM
• 0 = End of phase sequence
• 1 = Start of phase sequence

0x0BC1 3010 ALL R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Enable abnormal frequency transfer
UM
• 0 = Disable
• 1 = Enable
0x0BC2 3011 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SI Under Frequency Start/Drop-out
mer- threshold percent
al
• 0.80 ~ 0.98
• 80% ~ 98%

0x0BC4 3013 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SI Under Frequency Reset/Pick-up


mer- threshold percent
al
• Max[0.85, dropout + Fgap] ~ 1
• Max[ 85%, dropout + Fgap] ~
100%

0x0BC6 3015 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SII Under Frequency Start/Drop-out
mer- threshold percent
al
• 0.80 ~ 0.98
• 80% ~ 98%
0x0BC8 3017 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SII Under Frequency Reset/pick-up
mer- threshold percent
al
• Max[0.85, dropout + Fgap] ~ 1
• Max[ 85%, dropout + Fgap] ~
100%

0x0BCA 3019 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SI Over Frequency Start/Drop-out


mer- threshold percent
al
• 1.01 ~ 1.2
• 101% ~ 120%

0x0BCC 3021 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SI Over Frequency Reset/Pick-up


mer- threshold percent
al
• 1 ~ min[1.15, dropout-Fgap]
• 100% ~ min[115%, dropout -
Fgap]

0x0BCE 3023 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SII Over Frequency Start/Drop-out
mer- threshold percent
al
• 1.01 ~ 1.2

DOCA0214EN–01 259
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
0x0BD0 3025 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SII Over Frequency Reset/pick-up
mer- threshold percent
al
• 1 ~ min[1.15, dropout-Fgap]
• 100% ~ min[115%, dropout -
Fgap]

0x0BD3 3028 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SI Under voltage Start/Drop-out


mer- threshold percent
al
• 0.70 ~ 0.95
• 70% ~ 95%
0x0BD5 3030 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SI Under voltage Reset/Pick-up
mer- threshold percent
al
• Max[0.85, dropout+Vgap] ~ 1
• Max[ 85%, dropout + Vgap] ~
100%
0x0BD7 3032 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SII Under voltage Start/Drop-out
mer- threshold percent
al
• 0.70 ~ 0.95
• 70% ~ 95%
0x0BD9 3034 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SII Under voltage Reset/pick-up
mer- threshold percent
al
• Max[0.85, dropout+Vgap] ~ 1
• Max[ 85%, dropout + Vgap] ~
100%
0x0BDB 3036 ALL R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Enable over voltage transfer
UM
• 0 = Disable
• 1 = Enable
0x0BDC 3037 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SI Over voltage Start/Drop-out
mer- threshold percent
al
• 1.05 ~ 1.35
• 105% ~ 135%
0x0BDE 3039 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SI Over voltage Reset/Pick-up
mer- threshold percent
al
• 1 ~ min[1.15, dropout - Vgap]
• 100% ~ min[115%, dropout -
Vgap]

0x0BE0 3041 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SII Over voltage Start/Drop-out
mer- threshold percent
al
• 1.05 ~ 1.35
• 105% ~ 135%
0x0BE2 3043 ALL R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SII Over voltage Reset/Pick-up
mer- threshold percent
al
• 1 ~ min[1.15, dropout - Vgap]
• 100% ~ min[115%, dropout -
Vgap]

0x0BE4 3045 3P/4P R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Enable voltage unbalance


UM • 0 = Disable
• 1 = Enable
0x0BE5 3046 3P/4P R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SI unbalance threshold
mer-
• 0.02 ~ 0.30
al
• 2% ~ 30%
0x0BE7 3048 3P/4P R/W nu- FLOAT32 – TA – SII unbalance threshold
mer-
• 0.02 ~ 0.30
al
• 2% ~ 30%
0x0BE9 3050 4P R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Enable phase sequence warning
UM • 0 = Disable
• 1 = Enable

260 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
0x0BEA 3051 4P R EN- ENUM – TA – Source phase sequence
UM
• 0 = 1-2-3 (ro)

0x0BEF 3056 ALL R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Source priority


UM
• 1 = Source I is N and Source II
is A
• 2 = Source I is A and Source II
is N
0x0BF0 3057 ALL R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Source usage
UM
• 1 = U-U
• 2 = U-G
0x0BF1 3058 ALL R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Auto Transfer mode
UM
• 0 = auto return
• 1 = non-return (IEC) / mutual
standy (China)
• 2 = manual return
0x0BF2 3059 ALL R/W s FLOAT32 – TA – N to A confirmation transfer delay T2
• 0 ~ 1800
0x0BF4 3061 ALL R/W s FLOAT32 – TA – A to N confirmation transfer delay T6
• 0 ~ 3600
0x0BF6 3063 ALL R/W s FLOAT32 – TA – Center-Off time delay T4
• 0 ~ 30
0x0BF8 3065 ALL R/W s FLOAT32 – TA – Generator Start Delay T7
• 0 ~ 120
0x0BFA 3067 ALL R/W s FLOAT32 – TA – Generator Stop Delay T9
• 0 ~ 3600
0x0BFC 3069 ALL R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Enable genset start fail warning
UM
• 0 = Disable
• 1 = Enable
0x0BFD 3070 4P R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Enable neutral position wrong
UM warning
• 0 = Disable
• 1 = Enable
0x0BFE 3071 4P R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Enable neutral loss warning
UM • 0 = Disable
• 1 = Enable
0x0BFF 3072 ALL R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Onload test timer T13 limited
UM
• 0 = Unlimited
• 1 = Limited
0x0C00 3073 ALL R/W s FLOAT32 – TA – Onload test timer T13 time period
• 1 ~ 1800
0x0C02 3075 ALL R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Offload test timer T14 limited
UM
• 0 = Unlimited
• 1 = Limited
0x0C03 3076 ALL R/W s FLOAT32 – TA – Offload test timer T14 time period
• 1 ~ 1800
0x0C05 3078 ALL R/W EN- ENUM – TA – Test type from DI Test module config
UM
• 0 = Onload test
• 1 = Offload test
0x0C1B 3100 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SI Under Frequency Start/Drop-out
threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C1D 3102 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SI Under Frequency Reset/Pick-up


threshold value

DOCA0214EN–01 261
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C1F 3104 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SII Under Frequency Start/Drop-out


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C21 3106 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SII Under Frequency Reset/Pick-up


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C23 3108 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SI Over Frequency Start/Drop-out


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C25 3110 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SI Over Frequency Reset/Pick-up


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C27 3112 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SII Over Frequency Start/Drop-out


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C29 3114 ALL R Hz FLOAT32 – TA – SII Over Frequency Reset/Pick-up


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C2B 3116 ALL R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI Under voltage Start/Drop-out


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C2D 3118 ALL R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI Under voltage Reset/Pick-up


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C2F 3120 ALL R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII Under voltage Start/Drop-out


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C31 3122 ALL R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII Under voltage Reset/pick-up


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C33 3124 ALL R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI Over voltage Start/Drop-out


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C35 3126 ALL R V FLOAT32 – TA – SI Over voltage Reset/Pick-up


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C37 3128 ALL R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII Over voltage Start/Drop-out


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0C39 3130 ALL R V FLOAT32 – TA – SII Over voltage Reset/Pick-up


threshold value
• nominal freq * percent

0x0DAB 3500 ALL R – BOOL – TA 0 Genset start failure alarm validity


• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = valid
0x0DAC 3501 ALL R – BOOL – TA 0 Genset start failure alarm
• 1 = Yes
0x0DAD 3502 ALL R – BOOL – TA 0 External power supply presence
validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = valid
0x0DAE 3503 ALL R – BOOL – TA 0 External power supply presence
• 1 = Presence

262 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
0x0DAF 3504 ALL R – BOOL – TA 0 Onload test failure alarm validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = valid
0x0DAF 3504 ALL R – BOOL – TA 1 Offload test failure alarm validity
• 0 = Invalid
• 1 = valid
0x0DB0 3505 ALL R – BOOL – TA 0 Onload test failure alarm
• 1 = Yes
0x0DB0 3505 ALL R – BOOL – TA 1 Offload test failure alarm
• 1 = Yes
0x0DB1 3506 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Unexpected position alarm
UM • 0 = No alarm
• 1 = When transferring to A
position
• 2 = When transferring to N
position
• 3 = When transferring to off
position
• 4 = When transferring to invalid
position
• 5 = When in non-handle mode
0x0FBD 4030 ALL R nu- UINT32 – TA – Total Transfer count (no handle
mer- count)
al
• 0 ~ 65535
0x0FBF 4032 ALL R nu- UINT32 – TA – Total Transfer failure count
mer-
• 0 ~ 65535
al
0x0FC1 4034 ALL R nu- UINT32 – TA – Too fast transfer counter
mer-
• 0 ~ 65535
al
0x0FD1 4050 ALL R nu- UINT32 – TA – Configuration changed count
mer-
• 0 ~ 4294967295
al
0x01389 5002 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Force to off function supported
UM
• 1 = Supported

0x0138A 5003 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Force to off status


UM
• 0 = Inactive
• 1 = Active
0x0138B 5004 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Inhibit function supported
UM
• 1 = Supported

0x0138C 5005 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Inhibit status


UM
• 0 = Inactive
• 1 = Active
0x0138D 5006 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Voluntary remote control function
UM supported
• 1 = Supported

0x0138E 5007 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Voluntary remote control status


UM • 0 = Inactice
• 1 = to_N
• 2 = to_A

0x0138F 5008 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Fire function supported


UM
• 1 = Supported

0x01390 5009 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Fire status


UM • 0 = Inactive
• 1 = Active

DOCA0214EN–01 263
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
0x01391 5010 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – test status function supported
UM
• 1 = Supported

0x01392 5011 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – test status


UM • 0 = Inactive
• 1 = Active
0x01393 5012 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – HMI transfer function supported
UM
• 1 = Supported

0x01394 5013 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – HMI transfer status (local control)
UM
• 0 =Inactive
• 1 = Active
0x01395 5014 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA (Frame – Comm control function supported
UM 250 and 630 • 0 = unsupported
only)
• 1 = supported

0x01396 5015 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA (Frame – Transfer by comm status


UM 250 and 630 • 0 = Inactive
only)
• 1 = to_N
• 2 = to_A
• 3 = to_off

0x01397 5016 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA (Frame – Test result


UM 250 and 630 • 0 = last runtime result pass
only)
• 1 = last runtime result failure
• 2 = onload testing
• 3 = offload testing

0x0144F 5200 ALL R/W s FLOAT32 – TA – Load shedding time delay T8


• 0 ~ 15
0x0176F 6000 ALL R/W IE- DATE- – TA – System time
C87- TIME
• datetime IEC870-5-4
0-5-4
0x01773 6004 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Pole number
UM • 2 = 2P
• 3 = 3P
• 4 = 4P
0x01783 6020 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – Product Identifier
mer-
• 19750 for Frame 100 and
al
Frame 160
• 19751 for Frame 160 and
Frame 630
0x01784 6021 ALL R STR- STRING – TA – Vendor Name
ING • Schneider Electric
0x0178E 6031 ALL R STR- STRING – TA – Product Family
ING • TransferPacT Switch
0x01797 6040 ALL R STR- STRING – TA – Product Range
ING • TransferPacT
0x017A1 6050 ALL R STR- STRING – TA – Product Model
ING • TSE - Active Auto
• TSE - Auto
• TSE - WTS
• TSE - Manual
0x017A9 6058 ALL R STR- STRING – TA – Product Code
ING
CR num
0x017B1 6066 ALL R STR- STRING – TA – Serial Number
ING
PP-YY-ww-D-ll-xxxx

264 DOCA0214EN–01
Modbus Communication Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
0x017BB 6076 ALL R/W STR- STRING – TA – User Application Name
ING
"User app name"

0x017DB 6108 ALL R/W STR- STRING – TA – Product Capability


ING
"Product Capability"

0x017E7 6120 ALL R STR- STRING – TA – FW version


ING
xxx.yyy.zzz

0x017ED 6126 ALL R STR- STRING – TA – Hardware version


ING
xxx.yyy.zzz

0x017F3 6132 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA – Current running image type


UM
• 0 = Exploit
• 1 = Fct
• 2 = Upgrader

0x017F4 6133 ALL R STR- STRING – TA – Vendor URL


ING
www.se.com
0x02324 8997 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA (Frame – Enable transfer by comm
UM 250 and 630 • 0 = disable
only)
• 1= enable
0x02325 8998 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA (Frame – Check whether can do comm control
UM 250 and 630 • 0 = cannot do comm control
only)
• 1 = can do comm control
0x02326 8999 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA (Frame – Comm control method
UM 250 and 630 • 0 = simple control
only)
• 1 = advance control
0x02327 9000 ALL W EN- ENUM – TA (Frame – Transfer by comm request
UM 250 and 630
• 0 = exit
only)
• 1 = transfer to N
• 2 = transfer to A
• 3 = transfer to Off
0x02328 9001 ALL R EN- ENUM – TA (Frame – Enable test by comm
UM 250 and 630 • 0 = disable
only)
• 1 = enable
0x02329 9002 ALL W EN- ENUM – TA (Frame – Test by comm request
UM 250 and 630 • 0 = test inactive (exit)
only)
• 1 = onload test active
• 2 = offload test active
0x0270F 10000 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – Event log version
mer-
al 0-65535

0x02710 10001 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – Event log type


mer-
al 0-65535

0x02711 10002 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – Event log queue size (log number)
mer-
al 0-1000

0x02712 10003 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – Event log current log number in
mer- queue
al
0-1000
0x02713 10004 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – Event log latest index
mer-
al 0-65535

0x02714 10005 ALL R T- TI086 – TA – Event log content


I086

DOCA0214EN–01 265
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Modbus Communication

Address Register Pole RW Unit Type Ran- TA Bit Description


num- ge
ber
0x09C3F 40000 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – System log version
mer-
al 0-65535

0x09C40 40001 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – System log type


mer-
al 0-65535

0x09C41 40002 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – System log queue size (log number)
mer-
al 0-1000

0x09C42 40003 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – System log current log number in
mer- queue
al
0-1000
0x09C43 40004 ALL R nu- UINT16 – TA – System log latest index
mer-
al 0-65535

0x09C44 40005 ALL R T- TI086 – TA – System log content


I086

266 DOCA0214EN–01
Alarms and Troubleshooting Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Alarms and Troubleshooting


What’s in This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................... 268
Alarm ......................................................................................................... 269
Warning...................................................................................................... 272
Event Logs ................................................................................................. 279

DOCA0214EN–01 267
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Alarms and Troubleshooting

Overview
There are two types of alarms for ATSE and RSTE:
• Alarm
• Warning

Alarm Type Description

Alarm Indicates the controller detects a critical error or switch mechanism error. Do not
perform manual operation when ATSE is in alarm state. Contact field service
first, and/or check the root cause according to the Alarm Message, page 270 to
clear and acknowledge the alarm.

Warning Indicates the occurrence of unsuccessful testing, Genset start or detected


failure.

268 DOCA0214EN–01
Alarms and Troubleshooting Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Alarm
When an alarm is triggered, it will ignore all other alarms and the alarm LED shall
always be ON until it is acknowledged.
NOTE: The Modbus will provide the other alarms continuously.
The following are the methods to clear/acknowledge alarms:
• For TransferPacT Remote, cancel the alarm by resetting RTSE at site.
• For Automatic HMI, put the dielectric switch to TEST position and then put it
back to RUN to restart the controller to clear/acknowledged the alarm.
• For Active Automatic HMI, when an alarm is triggered, the HMI will pop-up
alarm screen. There will be a icon displayed on the page to indicate that
there is an active alarm.
Perform the following procedure to check and clear the alarm on Active Automatic:
1. Select the Set & Operate page and press OK.

Set & Operate

iew Set &..

Meas.. Status
02:47

2. Enter the password to open the Set & Operate page.


3. Select Operations sub-page.

Set & Operate


Operations
System Param
Application
Time Delays
02:47

4. Press Down button and select Alarm Ack.

Operations
Warning Ack
Alarm Ack
Local Control
On Load Test
03:21

5. Click OK on the screen.

Alarm Ack
SI Phase
AckRotation
All
Confirm?
OK
03:21

NOTE: A password is required to open the Set & Operate page.

DOCA0214EN–01 269
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Alarms and Troubleshooting

Alarm Message
Alarm Code Alarm Message LCD display

1 Position alarm: transfer to A error Transfer to A failed


2 Position alarm: transfer to N error Transfer to N failed
3 Position alarm: transfer to OFF error Transfer to OFF failed
4 Position alarm: transfer to invalid position Invalid position

5 Position Alarm: Internal error Internal error


6 Position alarm: unexpected position Unexpected position

10 Source I phase rotation error SI phase rotation

11 Source II phase rotation error SII phase rotation

12 Unsupported device RS alarm Unsupported device RS

Position Alarm: Transfer to A Error


• Event code: 1
• Type of event: Alarm.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When TSE cannot transfer to replacement, an alarm will be
raised.
• Cause: Stack of mechanism or failure of electronic components.
• Diagnosis and repair: Contact field service.

Position Alarm: Transfer to N Error


• Event code: 2.
• Type of event: Alarm.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When the TSE cannot transfer to normal, an alarm will be raised.
• Cause: Stack of mechanism or failure of electronic components.
• Diagnosis and repair: Contact field service.

Position Alarm: Transfer to Off Error


• Event code: 3.
• Type of event: Alarm.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When the TSE cannot transfer to off position, an alarm will be
raised.
• Cause: Stack of mechanism or failure of electronic components.
• Diagnosis and repair: Contact field service..

Position Alarm: Transfer to Invalid Position


• Event code: 4.
• Type of event: Alarm.

270 DOCA0214EN–01
Alarms and Troubleshooting Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

• Default: Always enable.


• Description: When TSE transfer to frequently, an alarm will be raised.
• Cause: Unexpected operating or controller failure.
• Diagnosis and repair: Contact field service..

Position Alarm: Internal Error


• Event code: 5
• Type of event: Alarm.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When TSE cannot transfer to off position, an alarm will be raised.
• Cause: Stack of mechanism or failure of electronic components.
• Diagnosis and repair: Contact field service..

Position Alarm: Unexpected Position


• Event code: 6
• Type of event: Alarm.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When micro-switch all closed, the TSE may lead short circuit of
two sources. an alarm will be raised.
• Cause: Welding issue of failure of micro-switch.
• Diagnosis and repair: Contact field service..

Source I or II Phase Rotation Failure


• Event code: 10,11.
• Type of event: Alarm.
• Default: Enabled (Disabled in China market)
• Description: When there is phase rotation such as from A-B-C move to C-B-A,
an alarm will be raised if this function is enabled.
• Cause: Wrong installing when first connection of main circuit or reform the
main connections.
• Diagnosis and repair: Double check the phase sequence of main circuit or
contact field service.

Unsupported Device RS Alarm


• Event code: 12.
• Type of event: Alarm.
• Default: Always enabled.
• Description: If a rotary switch is connected to a frame 250 or 630 TSE with
operation voltage from 208-250 V, an alarm will be raised.
• Cause: Rotary switch is not supported on the frame 250 or 630 TSE with
operation voltage from 208-250 V.
• Diagnosis and repair: Remove the rotary switch if it's connected or contact
field service.

DOCA0214EN–01 271
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Alarms and Troubleshooting

Warning
When the warning is triggered for event codes, such as 30,31,40,41,50,51,52 and
53, the HMI will pop-up the alarm screen. The green source LED blinks OFF or
ON for event codes such as 54,55,70,71,72,73,74,75,76,77,78,79,80 and 81. The
event code list and display method are shown in the below table.
The icon is displayed on the page to indicate an active warning.
If the warning is triggered, it will display the latest warning and previous alarms are
overwritten on the HMI. The log will be recorded.
Perform the following procedure to check and clear the alarm:
1. Select the Set & Operate page and press OK.

Set & Operate

iew Set &..

Meas.. Status
On Load Test Failure

2. Enter the password to open the Set & Operate page.


3. Select Operations sub-page.

Set & Operate


Operations
System Param
Application
Time Delays
On Load Test Failure

4. Press Down button and select Warning Ack.

Operations
Warning Ack
Alarm Ack
Local Control
On Load Test
On Load Test Failure

5. Click OK on the screen.

Warning Ack
SI No Ack
Voltage
All
SII No Voltage
Confirm?
On Load Test Failure
OK
On Load Test Failure

272 DOCA0214EN–01
Alarms and Troubleshooting Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

The warning will not inhibit the transfer functions for the below event codes:

List of Event Codes


Alarm code Alarm message LCD display method LED display method

30 Genset invalid Bottom bar None


31 Genset start failure Bottom bar None
40 On load test failure Bottom bar None
41 Off load test failure Bottom bar None
42 On load test success Bottom bar None
43 Off load test success Bottom bar None
50 SI unbalance warning Bottom bar None

51 SII unbalance warning Bottom bar None

52 SI neutral position wrong Bottom bar None


warning

53 SII neutral position Bottom bar None


wrong warning

54 SI neutral loss warning None LED source state


blinking

55 SII neutral loss warning None LED source state


blinking

70 SI under voltage None LED source state


blinking

71 SII under voltage None LED source state


blinking

72 SI over voltage None LED source state


blinking

73 SII over voltage None LED source state


blinking

74 SI no voltage None LED source state off

75 SII no voltage None LED source state off

76 SI under frequency None LED source state


blinking

77 SII under frequency None LED source state


blinking

78 SI over frequency None LED source state


blinking

79 SII over frequency None LED source state


blinking

80 SI all recover None LED source state on


81 SII all recover None LED source state on

SI Unbalance Warning
• Event code: 50.
• Type of event: Warning.
• Default: Disable.
• Description: If unbalance of voltage occurs over the drop-out rate of threshold
(5% as default) when SI is connected, a warning will be raised.
• Cause: Too many single-phase loads or poor quality of power supply
environment.

DOCA0214EN–01 273
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Alarms and Troubleshooting

• Diagnosis and repair: Set the different value of imbalance rate or contact field
service.

274 DOCA0214EN–01
Alarms and Troubleshooting Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

SII Unbalance Warning


• Event code: 51.
• Type of event: Warning.
• Default: Disable.
• Description: If unbalance of voltage occurs over the drop-out rate of threshold
(5% as default) when SII is connected, a warning will be raised.
• Cause: Too many single-phase loads or poor quality of power supply
environment.
• Diagnosis and repair: Set the different value of imbalance rate or contact field
service.

Generator Invalid
• Event code: 30.
• Type of event: Warning.
• Default: Always disable.
• Description: The sudden loss of an alternate source will lead to a warning.
• Cause: Genset is not connected well or some failure on Genset started
• Diagnosis and repair: Contact field service.

Generator Start Failure


• Event code: 31.
• Type of event: Warning.
• Default: Disable.
• Description: After sending the Genset start signal, controller will wait a time
T10 duration until Genset is ready.
◦ The ATSE will rise the Genset alarm, if Genset is not started within T10
timer is ended (if enabled).
◦ The ATSE shall reset the Genset alarm, when the A source is in range or
when the N source is in range.
◦ The time delay is only available when there is external power.
• Cause: Genset is not connected well or some failure on Genset started.
• Diagnosis and repair: Contact field service.

DOCA0214EN–01 275
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Alarms and Troubleshooting

On Load/Off Load Test Failure


• Event code: 40, 41
• Type of event: Warning.
• Default: Always enabled.
• Description: If on load or off load test is failed or interrupted, a warning will be
raised.
• Cause: Product failure or external interruption
• Diagnosis and repair: Contact field service.

SI or SII Neutral Position Wrong Warning


• Event code: 52, 53
• Type of event: Warning.
• Default: Always enabled in IEC market, disabled in China market.
• Description: If sequence of neutral is not connected as set value, a warning
will be raised.
• Cause: Wrong connection of neutral or wrong settings.
• Diagnosis and repair: Set the new neutral sequence or contact field service.

SI or SII Neutral Loss Warning


• Event code: 54, 55
• Type of event: Warning.
• Default: Disabled.
• Description: If unbalance rate of voltage occurs over 20% when source is
connected, a warning will be raised.
• Cause: Miss connection or disconnection caused by interior or exterior
impacts of neutral line..
• Diagnosis and repair: correct the connection or contact field service.

SI Under Voltage
• Event code: 70.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When there is under voltage on SI, an event log will be recorded.

SII Under Voltage


• Event code: 71.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When there is under voltage on SII, an event log will be
recorded.

276 DOCA0214EN–01
Alarms and Troubleshooting Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

SI Over Voltage
• Event code: 72.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Disabled.
• Description: When there is over voltage on SI, an event log will be recorded.

SII Over Voltage


• Event code: 73.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Disabled.
• Description: When there is over voltage on SII, an event log will be recorded.

SI No Voltage
• Event code: 74.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When there is source failure on SI, an event log will be recorded.

SII No Voltage
• Event code: 75.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When there is source failure on SII, an event log will be recorded.

SI Under Frequency
• Event code: 76.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Disable
• Description: When there is Under frequency on SI, an event log will be
recorded.

SII Under Frequency


• Event code: 77.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Disable
• Description: When there is Under frequency on SII, an event log will be
recorded.

DOCA0214EN–01 277
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Alarms and Troubleshooting

SI Over Frequency
• Event code: 78.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Disable
• Description: When there is Under frequency on SI, an event log will be
recorded.

SII Over Frequency


• Event code: 79.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Disable
• Description: When there is Under frequency on SII, an event log will be
recorded.

SI All Recover
• Event code: 80.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When SI recover to normal, an event log will be recorded.

SII All Recover


• Event code: 81.
• Type of event: Event.
• Default: Always enable.
• Description: When SII recover to normal, an event log will be recorded.

278 DOCA0214EN–01
Alarms and Troubleshooting Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Event Logs
TransferPacT ATSE can record maximum up to 99 events of the event logs. If it
exceeds the events limit, the latest logs will overwrite the previous event logs. The
limit of event logs on LCD and Modbus are:
• LCD can only display the last 20 events.
• Modbus can display all the events.
Perform the following procedure to check the event logs:
1. Select the Status page from Home page and press OK button.

Status

iew Set &..

Meas.. Status
02:47

2. Select Event Logs option and press OK button.

Status
Transfer Diag
Event Logs
Version

00:24

3. Select SI Back To Normal.

Event Logs
Transf. from A to N
SI Back To Normal
SI No Voltage
Transf. from N to A
01:33

4. Press OK button to check the selected event log.

Event Logs
Run Mode: Auto
Event Type: Raised
SI Back To Normal
Press OK for more
01:33

Detailed Info
2000 - 01 - 01 01:31
SI 392 392 390 50.0
SII 392 392 390 50.0

01:33

DOCA0214EN–01 279
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Alarms and Troubleshooting

Event Logs Page Description

Detailed Info
1 2000 - 01 - 01 01:31
2
SI 392 392 390 50.0
SII 392 392 390 50.0

01:33

Event Logs

3
Run Mode: Auto
Event Type: Raised
4 SI Back To Normal
Press OK for more
01:33

Label Description

1 Time of events.
NOTE: Without any time calibration or external DC 24 V, after long terms
shut down of controller, the timer may show wrong.

2 The source status during the events.

3 Code of events.
4 Transfer mode during the events.

NOTE: Event logs cannot be reset.

280 DOCA0214EN–01
Alarms and Troubleshooting Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

List of Event Logs


Event Code LCD Display

1 Position alarm: Transfer to A Failed


2 Position alarm: Transfer to N Failed
3 Position alarm: Transfer to OFF Failed
4 Position alarm: Transfer to Invalid Position
5 Position Alarm: Internal Error
6 Position alarm: Unexpected position

10 SI Phase Rotation Error


11 SII Phase Rotation Error
12 Unsupported Device RS Alarm

30 Genset Invalid
31 Genset Start Failure
40 On Load Test Failure
41 Off Load Test Failure
42 On Load Test Success
43 Off Load Test Success
50 SI Unbalance Warning

51 SII Unbalance Warning

52 SI Neutral Position Wrong Warning

53 SII Neutral Position Wrong Warning

54 SI Neutral Loss Warning

55 SII Neutral Loss Warning

70 SI Undervoltage

71 SII Undervoltage

72 SI Overvoltage

73 SII Overvoltage

74 SI No Voltage

75 SII No Voltage

76 SI Underfrequency

77 SII Underfrequency

78 SI Overfrequency

79 SII Overfrequency

80 SI All Recover
81 SII All Recover
100 SI Voltage over 500 V

101 SII Voltage over 500 V

120 Transfer from N to A


121 Transfer from A to N
122 Transfer from N to O
123 Transfer from A to O
124 Transfer from O to N
125 Transfer from O to A
140 Load Shedding Output

DOCA0214EN–01 281
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Alarms and Troubleshooting

Event Code LCD Display

141 Genset Start


142 Genset Stop

143 Alarm Output Start

144 Alarm Output Stop

145 Force to OFF


146 Fire Start
147 Fire Stop

148 Enter Inhibit Mode


149 On Load Test
150 Off Load Test
151 Voluntary to N

152 Voluntary to A

153 Comm Transfer Exit


154 Comm Transfer to N
155 Comm Transfer to A
156 Comm Transfer to OFF
200 Operation Mode Changed

282 DOCA0214EN–01
Dielectric Test Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Dielectric Test
Dielectric Test Switch

NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
• Before dielectric test, put the dielectric switch to test position to turn off the
controller.
• After the dielectric test, put the dielectric switch back to run position to power
on the controller.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The dielectric switch on the controller is used to disconnect the controller before
performing the dielectric test and install accessory. Both functions are needed to
disconnect dielectric switch. The arrow position of the switch indicates whether the
controller is disconnected (Test) or connected (Run) to perform the dielectric test.

Perform the following procedure for dielectric test:


1. Insert the screwdriver and rotate anti-clockwise to bring it to Test position.

90°

2. Perform the dielectric test once the dielectric switch is ejected.

3. Insert the screwdriver and rotate the dielectric switch clockwise to bring it to
Run position after the dielectric test.

90°

DOCA0214EN–01 283
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Cybersecurity

Cybersecurity

NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
• Keep side label intact.
• Do not touch the product if side label is broken as it may defect the
equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

For more information on Cybersecurity, refer to Cybersecurity Guide.

284 DOCA0214EN–01
Acronyms and Terminology Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A

Acronyms and Terminology


Short terms Expansion Description

TSE Transfer Switching Equipment Self-acting transfer switching equipment, including all necessary
sensing inputs, monitoring, and control logic for transferring
ATSE Automatic Transfer Switching operations.
Equipment

RTSE Remote Transfer Switching Remote operated transfer switching equipment


Equipment

MTSE Manual Transfer Switching Equipment Manually operated transfer switching equipment

SI Source I SI supply

SII Source II SII supply

N Normal Normal supply

A Alternate Alternate supply

E Emergency

O Off position Two powers are disconnected

Specific TSE Specific transfer switching equipment 2/3 position dedicated designed as IEC 60947-6-1 product
requirement

Derived TSE Derived transfer switching equipment Fulfilling requirements of other IEC 60947 product standards

Open transition Normal transfer The basic transfer function

In phase transition Sync transition Open transition but detect phase angle when re-transfer

Delayed transition Delay transition A programmable time delay for neutral position

Close transition Close transition A load transfer by momentarily paralleling both sources

Neutral overlapping Transfer with neutral overlapping Making before breaking and N will never be lost

Under voltage sensor Detect the Undervoltage of power source

Over voltage sensor Detect the Overvoltage of power source

Frequency sensor Detect the frequency of power source

Voltage imbalance sensor Detect the balance of power source

Phase rotation sensor Detect the phase angle of power source

Loss of single-phase Detect the phase of power source


sensor
T2 Transfer Delay Transfer delay

T4 Center-off Delay Center-off delay

T6 Re-Transfer Delay Re-Transfer Delay

T7 Genset Start Delay Genset start delay

T8 Loadshed Delay Loadshed delay

T9 Genset Cool Delay Genset cool delay

T10 Genset Fail Delay Genset fail delay

T13 On Load Test Delay On load test delay

T14 Off Load Test Delay Off load test delay

Power supply models An additional power supply connection for controller

Auto-return A working mode for ATSE controller

Non-return A working mode for ATSE controller

Manual-return A working mode for ATSE controller

Load shed A signal from ATSE controller to shed the load

DOCA0214EN–01 285
Transfer Switching Equipment 32–630 A Acronyms and Terminology

Short terms Expansion Description

Transfer inhibit Override transfer orders


Genset start A Genset start signal from controller

Fire protection Shed the ATSE when fire signal is received

Voluntary remote control Transfer remotely

External 24 Vdc External power for controller/communication

286 DOCA0214EN–01
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil Malmaison
France
+ 33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
www.se.com

As standards, specifications, and design change from time to time,


please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.

© 2022 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.


DOCA0214EN–01

You might also like